2007 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M - General Motors …€¦ · · 2011-10-24Service and...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 13Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 41Airbag System ........................................ 68Restraint System Check ......................... 84

Features and Controls ................................. 87Keys ....................................................... 88Doors and Locks .................................... 94Windows ............................................... 101Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 103Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 107Mirrors .................................................. 124Storage Areas ...................................... 126Sunroof ................................................ 128

Instrument Panel ........................................ 129Instrument Panel Overview ................... 132Climate Controls ................................... 150Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators .................................... 156Secondary Information Center (SIC) ...... 174Audio System(s) ................................... 186

Driving Your Vehicle .................................. 219Your Driving, the Road,

and Your Vehicle .............................. 220Towing ................................................. 258

Service and Appearance Care ................... 261Service ................................................. 264Fuel ...................................................... 266Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 273Headlamp Aiming ................................. 309

2007 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M

1

Bulb Replacement ................................ 309Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 318Tires ..................................................... 319Appearance Care .................................. 345Vehicle Identification ............................. 354Electrical System .................................. 355Capacities and Specifications ................ 368 Index ............................................................423 Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................ 369

Maintenance Schedule ............................... 371Maintenance Schedule .......................... 372

Customer Assistance Information ............. 401Customer Assistance and Information .... 402Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 419

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, andthe name AVEO are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15876628 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Manual Lumbar (Sedan) ................................ 9Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 12

Rear Seats .................................................... 13Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) ...................... 13Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback) ................ 15

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 33Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 34Right Front Passenger Position ................... 34Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 35Center Rear Passenger Position .................. 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 40Safety Belt Extender ................................... 40

Child Restraints ............................................ 41Older Children ............................................. 41Infants and Young Children ......................... 44Child Restraint Systems .............................. 47Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 52Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 53Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 64Airbag System .............................................. 68

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 71When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 74What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 75How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 75What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ... 76Passenger Sensing System ......................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 82Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 83Restraint System Check ............................... 84

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 85

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Pull up and hold the barlocated under the front ofthe seat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe bar. Then try to move the seat with your body,to make sure the seat is locked into place.

8

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

To adjust the height ofthe driver’s seatcushion, turn the knoblocated on the outboardside of the seatcushion.

Turn the knob forward to raise the height of theseat cushion and rearward to lower it.

Manual Lumbar (Sedan)Your vehicle may have manually operated lumbarsupport for the driver’s seat.

To adjust the front seat lumbar support, use thelever located on the outboard side of the seatback.

Push the lever down to adjust the support forthe lower part of the seatback. Pull the lever up toreturn the support to its original position.

9

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. Thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

10

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

11

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechances of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower it,press the button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the head restraint down.

The front seat head restraints also tilt forward. Totilt the head restraint, first put it in the uprightposition by tilting it forward fully and releasing it.Then slowly move the head restraint forward until itis in the desired position.

12

The front head restraints can also be removed. Toremove the restraint, press the button locatedon the top of the seatback, and lift the headrestraint from the guide sleeve. Replace the headrestraint before driving.

The rear seats have head restraints that areadjustable up and down, but they do not tilt.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation (Sedan)

Folding the SeatbackThe rear seatbacks can be folded down toincrease cargo space.

To fold down the seatback, do the following:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage tothe seat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

1. Remove the safety belt strap from the safetybelt guide by pulling it through the slot.

2. Push the head restraints all the way down.

13

3. Pull up the release knob located on top of therear seatback.

4. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.

To return the seatback to the upright position, dothe following:

1. Hook the safety belts into the safety beltguide.

2. Lift the seatback up and push it to its originalposition.

{CAUTION:


3. Push down and rearward firmly on the top ofthe seatback until it latches securely in thefully upright position.

14

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

4. Insert the safety belt strap back into the safetybelt guide.

Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback)

Folding the Rear SeatsThe rear seats can be folded to increase cargospace.

To fold the rear seats, do the following:

1. Lower the head restraints completely.

2. Detach the center safety belt from the minibuckle by pressing the black release buttonon the buckle.

15

3. Pull up the release knob, located on the top ofthe seatback, and fold the seatback forwardand down.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

4. Move the safety belt buckles and safety beltin the center seating position out of the spacebetween the seatback and the seat cushionso they are not in the way as the seat is beingfolded.

16

5. Pull the release handles on the rear side ofthe seat cushion to unlock the seat cushion.

6. Lift the seat cushion up and flip it forward.

7. Clip the hook to the front seat head restraintto keep the rear seat secure.

8. When the rear seat is folded, store the safetybelt buckles and center safety belt in thestorage area under the floor mat.

17

Unfolding the SeatsTo return the rear seats to the normal seatingposition, do the following:

1. Unclip the hook from the front seat headrestraint.

2. Remove the safety belt buckles and centerseat safety belt from the storage area.

Notice: Damage to the safety belt buckle orrear seat locking mechanism can occur ifthe safety belt and buckles are pinched underthe rear seat cushion. Do not place thesafety belt and buckles on the floor under therear seat cushion when the rear seat is putback to the sitting position.

3. Push the seat cushion down to its originalposition until it latches securely. Try to pullup on the seat to make sure it is lockedin place.

4. Hook the safety belts in the outboard seatingpositions into the retaining clips.

18

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

5. Lift the seatback up and push it back to itsoriginal latched position.

6. Unhook the safety belts in the outboardseating positions from the retaining clips.

7. Return the safety belt buckles and the centerseat safety belt to their original positionbetween the rear seatback and the seatcushion. Make sure the straps of the safetybelt and buckles are not twisted.

8. Reattach the center seat safety belt to themini buckle. See Center Rear PassengerPosition on page 39.

{CAUTION:


9. Push down and rearward firmly on the top ofthe seatback until it latches securely in thefully upright position.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Light onpage 175.

20

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

21

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

22

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

23

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

24

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 41 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 44. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

25

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 40.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 33.

26

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

27

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

28


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

29


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

30


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

31


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

32

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressingthe release button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

33

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

34

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside PositionsLap-Shoulder BeltThe positions next to the windows havelap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear alap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Be sure you are using the correctbuckle and that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.

35

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,tilt the latch plate and keep pulling untilyou can buckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on thebuckle end of the belt as you pull up on theshoulder part.

36

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

37

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle.

38

Center Rear Passenger PositionYour vehicle has a retractable safety belt in thecenter rear seating position.

Here is how to use the center rear safety belt.

1. Pull the center rear safety belt from theretractor.

2. Push the latch plate at the end of the safetybelt strap into the buckle with the blackrelease button until the mechanism clicks.Make sure the strap is not twisted. The slidinglatch plate will face the front of the vehicle.

3. Pick up the sliding latch plate and pull the beltacross you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the red buckle.If the belt stops before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pullinguntil you can buckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down thebuckle end of the belt as you pull up onthe shoulder part.

39

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 85.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. Whenyou go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you willwear, so the extender will be long enough foryou. To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it for securing childseats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

40

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

41

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. If the child is sitting in thecenter rear seat passenger position, move thechild toward the safety belt buckle. In eithercase, be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crashthe child’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide.

42

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

43

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

44

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for

CAUTION: (Continued)


young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

45

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

46

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

47

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

48

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

49

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 53 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,and to this manual. The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

50

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

51

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We, therefore, recommend that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, including aninfant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a childriding in a forward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag orairbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

52

There are a couple of things you need to knowabout using child restraints in your rear seat:

If you use a childrestraint in the centerrear seating position, thesafety belts and the childrestraint LATCH anchorsfor the rear outsideseating positions will notbe accessible.

Therefore, you will not be able to secure childrestraints or have passengers ride in therear outside seating positions.

If you use two childrestraints in the rearoutside seatingpositions, the safety beltfor the center rearseat position will not beaccessible.

Therefore, you will not be able to secure a childrestraint or have a passenger ride in the centerrear seating position.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

53

When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors orthe safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

54

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

55

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, nearthe crease betweenthe seatback andthe seat cushion.

Hatchback models may have zippers over thelower anchor areas. If so, unzip the seat coverbelow the labels to access each lower anchor.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

56

For sedan models, the top tether anchors arelocated under the trim covers behind the rear seaton the filler panel. Pull open the cover to accessthe top tether anchors. Be sure to use ananchor located on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraintwill be placed.

For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B)are located in the rear cargo area, attached tothe back wall (A) of the vehicle. Squeeze and pullthe front part of the plastic cover to access thetop tether anchors. Remove the cargo shadebefore installing the top tether. The cargo shadeshould remain off while the top tether is in use. Besure to use an anchor located on the same sideof the vehicle as the seating position wherethe child restraint will be placed.

Sedan Hatchback

57

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 52 for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type



child restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

58

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

59

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Flip the cover to access the top tether

anchors.2.3. For hatchback models, remove the

cargo shade before installing the toptether. The cargo shade should remainoff while the top tether is in use.

2.4. Raise the head restraint if the desiredseating position has an adjustable headrestraint. See Head Restraints onpage 12.

2.5. Route and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

60

If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 53.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

If you need to install more than one child restraintin the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 52. There is not roomfor three child restraints in the rear seat, but youcan install two child restraints, one in eachrear outside seating position.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

61

3. Buckle the belt. Be sure the latch plate clickswhen you put it into the buckle. This meansyou are using the correct buckle. Also,make sure the release button is positioned soyou would be able to unbuckle the safetybelt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

62

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 53.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

63

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 52.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped) whenan infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 77 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (Sedan) on page 161 for moreinformation on this including important safetyinformation.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped), if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag or airbags willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag or airbags are off.

64

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8.

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 53.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 53 if your childrestraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has airbags. See PassengerSensing System on page 77. GeneralMotors recommends that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even if theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andside airbag (if equipped) is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seatas far back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See ManualSeats on page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and side airbag (if equipped), theoff symbol in the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit when you turnthe ignition to ON or START. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator (Sedan) on page 161.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

65

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

66

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


67

8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off symbolon the instrument panel near the clock will belit and stay lit when the key is turned toON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the offsymbol is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, checkto make sure that the vehicle’s seatback isnot pressing the child restraint into the seatcushion. If this happens, slightly recline thevehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion ifpossible. Also make sure the child restraint isnot trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the head restraint.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers heaters or massagers, located between theseat cushion and the child restraint or smalloccupant, can affect how the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat cushion before reinstalling/securingthe child restraint or small occupant.

If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags.Side impact airbags are available for the driver andright front passenger.

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver and/or the right front passenger, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on theside of the seatback closest to the door.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

68

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.



Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

69

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Front occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 41 or Infants and Young Children onpage 44.

70

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel clusteror the SecondaryInformation Center(SIC), which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 160 or Airbag Readiness Light on page 176for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

71

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.

72

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for theright front passenger, it is in the side of thepassenger’s seatback closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories that blockthe inflation path of a seat-mounted sideimpact airbag.

73

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel is about 9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h). Thethreshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 68.Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes.

74

A side impact airbag will inflate if the crashseverity is above the system’s designed “thresholdlevel.” The threshold level can vary with specificvehicle design. Side impact airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle thatis struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown in frontal and near-frontal impacts. Forside impact airbags, inflation is determined by thelocation and severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, the airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside thesteering wheel and instrument panel. For seatingpositions with side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the seatbacksclosest to the door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

75

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, and forseating positions with side impact airbags, the sideof the seatback closest to the door — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for thosefeatures.

76

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey inflate, you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there to help protectyou in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts. Theservice manual for your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 413.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when youturn your ignition key to ON or START.

If you have a sedan, the airbag off symbol will bevisible near the clock, located in the center ofthe instrument panel, during the system check.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Sedan) onpage 161.

United States – Sedan Canada – Sedan

77

If you have a hatchback, the airbag off symbol willbe visible in the Secondary Information Center(SIC) during the system check. See SecondaryInformation Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)on page 174. When the system check is complete,the airbag off symbol will be visible under certainconditions.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with asensor that is part of the right front passenger’sseat cushion. The sensor is designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant and

determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped) should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear, rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates.


UnitedStates – Hatchback

Canada – Hatchback

78


This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be veryclose to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag orairbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped), the off symbol willlight and stay lit to remind you that the airbag orairbags are off. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (Sedan) on page 161.

79

If a child restraint has been installed and the offsymbol is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 64.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped)anytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right front

passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag or airbags tobe enabled, the off symbol will not light.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped), depending upon theperson’s seating posture and body build. Everyonein your vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whetheror not there is an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off symbol is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens do the following:

Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to placethe seatback in the fully upright position, thensit upright in the seat, centered on the seatcushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about two minutes.This will allow the system to detect that person andthen enable the passenger’s airbag or airbags.

80

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.



If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag and sideairbag (if equipped). See AirbagReadiness Light on page 176 for more onthis, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint or small occupant. You may wantto consider not using seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment if your vehicle has thepassenger sensing system. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 83 formore information about modifications that canaffect how the system operates.

81

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 420.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

82

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to theexterior of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 402.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, or airbag wiring can affectthe operation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 402.

Your dealer/retailer and the service manual haveinformation about the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnostic module andairbag wiring.

83

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 348.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect youin a crash. They can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new oneright away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, or an airbag covering on a seatback(if equipped), the airbag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag module inthe steering wheel, both the airbag module andthe instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag, or both the airbagmodule and the seatback for seating positionswith a side impact airbag (if equipped). Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

84

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

85

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part about the airbagsystem earlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt pretensioners and safety belt. Be sureto do so. Then the new pretensioner and safetybelt will be there to help protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand right front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags havenot deployed. The driver and right frontpassenger’s safety belt retractor assembliescontain the safety belt pretensioners. Have yoursafety belt pretensioners checked if yourvehicle has been in a collision, or if your airbagreadiness light stays on after you start your vehicleor while you are driving. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 176.

86

Keys .............................................................. 88Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 90Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 91Doors and Locks .......................................... 94

Door Locks ................................................. 94Central Door Unlocking System ................... 95Door Ajar Reminder .................................... 95Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 96Lockout Protection ....................................... 97Trunk .......................................................... 97Liftgate (Hatchback) ................................... 100

Windows ...................................................... 101Manual Windows ....................................... 101Power Windows ........................................ 102Sun Visors ................................................ 103

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 103Theft-Deterrent System .............................. 103Immobilizer ................................................ 106Immobilizer Operation ................................ 106

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 107New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 107Ignition Positions ....................................... 108

Starting the Engine .................................... 109Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 110Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 112Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 116Parking Brake ........................................... 117Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 120Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transaxle) .... 121Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 121Engine Exhaust ......................................... 122Running the Engine While Parked ............. 123

Mirrors ......................................................... 124Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 124Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 124Outside Power Mirror ................................ 125Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 126Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 126

Storage Areas ............................................. 126Glove Box ................................................. 127Cupholder(s) .............................................. 127Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............. 127

Sunroof ....................................................... 128

Section 2 Features and Controls

87

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

88

One key is used for theignition, the doors andall other locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerremoves the key tag and gives it to the first owner.The tag has a code on it that tells your dealerhow to make extra keys. For vehicle security, keepthe key tag in a safe place and also record thekey number somewhere other than inside ofthe vehicle. If you lose your key, you will be ableto have a new one made easily using the tag.

Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizerdesigned to protect your car against theft. Ifso, only keys with the correct electronic code canbe used to start the vehicle. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 106 for additional information.Even if a key has the same profile, it will notstart the engine if the electronic code is incorrect.If you need a new key, contact your dealerwho can obtain the correct key code. Also seeRoadside Assistance Program on page 408.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle toget in. Be sure you have spare keys.

89

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 91.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianfor service.

90

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationYou can lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors fromabout 20 ft (6 m) away using the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system:

Hatchback

Q (Lock): Press this button to lock all of thedoors. If all of the doors and the trunk or liftgate areclosed, the hazard lamps will flash once and thehorn will chirp to indicate that locking has occurredand that the theft-deterrent system is active.

K (Unlock): Press this button to unlock all ofthe doors. The hazard lamps will flash twiceto indicate that unlocking has occurred and thatthe theft-deterrent system is deactivated.

Hatchback Sedan

91

Sedan

n (Lock/Unlock): Press this button to lock all ofthe doors. The hazard lamps will flash onceto indicate that locking has occurred and that thetheft-deterrent system is active. Press thisbutton again to unlock all of the doors. The hazardlamps will flash twice to indicate that unlockinghas occurred and that the theft-deterrent system isdeactivated.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and holdthis button for approximately one second toopen the trunk.

The LED light, on the transmitter, will flash whenthe buttons on the transmitter are pressed.

The lock and unlock buttons will not operate andthe theft-deterrent system will not activatewhile the key is in the ignition.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any remaining transmitters with you whenyou go to your dealer. When the dealer matchesthe replacement transmitter to your vehicle,any remaining transmitters must also be matched.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fivetransmitters matched to it.

92

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about two years.

The battery is weak if the LED fails to illuminate orif the transmitter will not work at the normalrange in any location. If you have to get close toyour vehicle before the transmitter works, it isprobably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter, dothe following:

1. Remove the screw from the back of the coverand open the cover of the transmitter.

2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover andcarefully detach the sticker from the unit.Keep the sticker clean.

3. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive side of thebattery faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1620,or equivalent, type battery.

4. Attach the sticker and put the transmitter unitin the cover.

5. Put the two halves back together and replacethe screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

6. Test the transmitter operation.

Hatchback Sedan

93

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extreme



heat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 91.

To manually unlock the front doors from theoutside, insert the key and turn it toward the frontof the vehicle. To manually lock the doors fromthe outside, insert the key and turn it towardthe rear of the vehicle.

94

All doors, except for the driver’s door, can belocked by pushing down the manual door lock andthen closing the door. The driver’s door canonly by locked from the outside by using the keyor the optional remote keyless entry transmitter.

From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of thedoors by pushing or pulling the manual doorlock located on each door.

Central Door Unlocking SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with the centraldoor unlocking system. This system is activatedfrom the driver’s door.

From the outside, you can lock or unlock all thedoors by using either the key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped. From theinside, you can lock or unlock all the doorsby using the driver’s door lock switch while thedriver’s door is closed.

Door Ajar Reminder

If one of the doors onthe sedan is not closedproperly while theignition is on, the doorajar light on theinstrument panel comeson and stays on untilthe doors are closed.

If one of the doors on the hatchback is not closedproperly while the ignition is on, the door ajarlight on the secondary information center comeson and stays on until the doors are closed.

95

Rear Door Security Locks

Your vehicle has reardoor security locks oneach rear door thatprevent passengersfrom opening therear doors fromthe inside.

Using the Rear Door Security Lock1. Move the lever up to lock.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.

Notice: Pulling the inside door handle whilethe rear door security locks are engaged coulddamage your vehicle. Do not pull the insidedoor handle while the rear door security locksare engaged.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside while this feature is in use.

Opening a Rear Door When theSecurity Lock is On

1. Unlock the door from the inside.

2. Open the door from the outside.

If you do not cancel the security lock, adults orolder children who ride in the rear will not be ableto open the rear door from the inside. Youshould let adults and older children know how tocancel the locks.

Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock1. Unlock the door from the inside and open

the door from the outside.

2. Move the lever down to unlock.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

The rear door locks can now be locked andunlocked normally.

96

Lockout ProtectionThis feature helps prevent locking the key in thecar. The driver’s door can only be locked withthe door closed. From the outside of the vehicle,close the driver’s door and lock it using the key orthe Remote Keyless Entry transmitter.

This feature cannot guarantee that you will neverbe locked out of your vehicle. Always rememberto take your key with you.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.



If you must drive with the trunk lid openor if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 122.

To open the trunk on your sedan from outside ofyour vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinderand turn the key clockwise or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped.

97

Remote Trunk Release

If your vehicle has atrunk release buttonlocated on the driver’sdoor, you can openthe trunk from insideyour vehicle by pressingthe release button.

When closing the trunk, close from the center toensure it fully latches.

If your vehicle has atrunk release leverlocated on the outboardside of the driver’sseat, you can open thetrunk from insideyour vehicle by pullingthe release lever.

Trunk Release Button Trunk Release Lever

98

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the underside of thetrunk lid. This handle will glow following exposureto light. Pull the release handle down to openthe trunk from the inside.

99

Liftgate (Hatchback)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the liftgate open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System on page 150.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 122.

To open the liftgate on your hatchback fromoutside of the vehicle, insert the key into the lockcylinder and turn it counterclockwise or usethe remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.Then pull up the handle above the licenseplate to open the liftgate.

When closing the liftgate, close from the center toensure it fully latches.

To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lockcylinder and turn it clockwise or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped.

The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by thecentral door unlocking system or remote keylessentry, if equipped. See Central Door UnlockingSystem on page 95 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 91.

100

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsUse the window crank to open and close eachwindow.

The rear windows do not open fully.

101

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in a vehiclewith children.When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

If your vehicle has power windows, the switchesare located on the driver’s door. In addition,each passenger door has a switch for its ownwindow.

The ignition must be turned to ON to use thepower windows. To lower the window, press andhold the switch. To raise the window, lift upon the switch. Release the switch when thewindow reaches the desired level.

102

Window Lockout

The window lockoutis located with thedriver’s powerwindow switches.

Press the lockout button to stop the front and rearpassengers from using their window switches.The driver can still operate all the windows with thelockout on. Press the lockout button again toreturn to normal window operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare you can swing down the visors.You can also remove them from the centermount and swing them to the side.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has vanity mirrors located on theback of the sun visors. Swing down the sun visorto expose the vanity mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle may have a theft-deterrent system.

The theft-deterrent system will not arm whenyou lock the doors using the key or the manualdoor lock. It arms only when you use the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

103

Arming the SystemTo arm the system, do the following:

1. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, andthe trunk or liftgate.Ensure that the windows are closed, as thesystem can be armed even if the windowsare open.

2. Turn the key to LOCK and remove the keyfrom the ignition.If the key is inserted in the ignition, thetransmitter will not arm the theft-deterrentsystem.

3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

• The LED light on the transmitter willflash once.

• All of the doors will lock.

• The hazard warning lamps will flash onceand the horn will chirp.

• The security light will flash to indicate thatthe theft-deterrent system is armed. Forhatchback models, the security lightis located on the secondary informationcenter (SIC) on the center of the instrumentpanel. See Secondary Information Center(SIC) (Hatchback Only) on page 174.For sedan models, the security light islocated on the center of the instrumentpanel near the clock. See Instrument PanelOverview on page 132.

To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do oneof the following:

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front doorusing the key.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Unlocking a door any other way will activate thealarm when a door or the trunk or liftgate isopened.

If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrentsystem, lock the vehicle using the key or themanual door locks.

104

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system, do one of the following:

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s frontdoor using the key.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

− The LED light on the transmitter willflash once.

− All of the doors will unlock.− The hazard warning lamps will

flash twice.

If the door is not opened or if the engine is notstarted within 30 seconds after disarming thesystem using the transmitter, all of the doors willautomatically lock and the theft-deterrent mode willrearm.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened withoutusing the key or the remote keyless entrytransmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps willflash for up to 30 seconds.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmIf the system alarm is active, it can be deactivatedusing one of the following methods:

• Press the lock or unlock buttons on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front doorusing the key.

Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after30 seconds. The system will then lock thedoors and rearm the theft-deterrent system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf the hazard warning lamps flash once when youpress the lock or unlock buttons on the remotekeyless entry transmitter, the theft-deterrentsystem alarm was activated while you were away.

105

ImmobilizerThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:


2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Immobilizer OperationYour vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrentsystem. The immobilizer system prevents yourvehicle from being started by unauthorized persons.

If your vehicle has an immobilizer system, yourvehicle has a special key that works with thetheft-deterrent system. There is a transponder inthe key head that is electronically coded. Thecorrect key will start the vehicle. An invalidkey immobilizes the engine. The immobilizersystem isolates the power supply to the ignitionsystem, the fuel pump and the fuel injectors.

The engine immobilizer is activated after the key isturned to LOCK and removed from the ignition. Thesecurity light located on the top center of theinstrument panel in the secondary informationcenter will flash when the immobilizer is active. Ifthe light does not flash after removing the key, havethe system checked by your dealer.

If the immobilizer system does not recognize theelectronic code when the key is turned toSTART, the engine will not start and the securityindicator will continue blinking. If your key is everdamaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle.

106

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine doesnot start and the security light continues flashing,the key may have a damaged transponder.Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another key. At thistime, you may also want to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 356. Ifthe engine still does not start with the other key,your vehicle needs service. If your vehicledoes start, the first key may be faulty. See yourdealer who can have a new key made.

Up to five keys may be programmed for thevehicle. If you lose or damage your keys, only aGM dealer can have new keys made.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you will be able to restart yourengine if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system,however, is not working properly and must beserviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the theft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 408.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings canmean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

107

Ignition Positions

The ignition switchcan be turned tofour differentpositions withthe key.

{CAUTION:

On manual transaxle vehicles, turning thekey to LOCK and removing it will lock thesteering column and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key only to ACC. Do not push thekey in while the vehicle is moving.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

LOCK: This position locks the steering wheel,ignition, shift lever and transaxle. This is the onlyposition in which you can insert or remove thekey. If the steering wheel is locked, move it formright to left and turn the key to ACC (Accessory).

ACC (Accessory): This position operatessome of the electrical accessories, such asthe radio, but not the climate control system.

ON: This is the position the switch returns afteryou start the engine and release the key. Theswitch stays in ON when the engine is running. Buteven when the engine is not running, you can useON to operate the electrical accessories, and todisplay some instrument panel warning lights.

108

START: This position starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. The switchreturns to ON for normal driving. Do not turn thekey to START if the engine is running.

Even if the engine is not running, ACC and ONallow you to operate electrical accessories,such as the radio.

Starting the Engine

Automatic TransaxleMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).The engine will not start in any other position — thatis a safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and theparking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal tothe floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will notstart if the clutch pedal is not all the waydown — that is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage your starter motor.Wait about 15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining your battery or damagingyour starter.

2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds andtry again to start the engine by turning theignition to START. Wait about 15 secondsbetween each try.When the engine has run about 10 seconds towarm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven.Do not run your engine at high speedwhen it is cold.If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),let the engine run for a few minutes towarm up.

109

3. If the engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in STARTfor about three seconds. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do the samething, but this time keep the pedal down forfive or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater isnot required.

110

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, nearthe battery.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

111

Automatic Transaxle Operation

If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, theshift lever is located on the console betweenthe seats.

Movement between certain positions requirespushing the release button on the front ofthe shifter.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannotmove easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 118.

112

Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle hasan automatic transaxle shift lock control system.You have to apply your regular brakes before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the key is in ON.If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holdingthe brake pedal down, see Shifting Out of Park (P)on page 120.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) toREVERSE (R), you need to apply the regularbrake and push the release button on the front ofthe shifter and then forward.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 248.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whileyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

113

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4): This position isfor normal driving.

When operating your vehicle in severe coldconditions, the transaxle may be prevented fromshifting into D4 gear until the transaxle fluidhas warmed up to it’s operational temperature.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly or not shift gears when you go faster,and you continue to drive your vehicle thatway, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. Youcan drive in SECOND (2) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D4) for higher speeds until then.

SECOND (2): This position gives you morepower but lower fuel economy. You can useSECOND (2) on hills. It can help control yourspeed as you go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to use your brakesoff and on.

Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speedsover 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage thetransaxle. Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4) asmuch as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)unless you are going slower than 65 mph(105 km/h) or you can damage your engine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even morepower but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2).You can use it on very steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1),the transaxle will not shift into first gear untilthe vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. Ifyou are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

If there is a malfunction with the automatictransaxle, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) orthe HOLD indicator light will turn on or flash.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 180 orHold Mode Light on page 180.

Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

114

Hold ModeIf your vehicle’s transaxle has hold mode, you canselect this mode to drive with some characteristicsof a manual transaxle. With hold mode turnedon, the automatic transaxle will stay in a specificgear range.

Press the HOLD button on the shift lever consoleto turn on hold mode. Press the button againto turn off hold mode, and return to normalautomatic transaxle operation.

For the Hatchback, the HOLD light will light up onthe secondary information center. For the Sedan,the HOLD light will light up on the instrument panelcluster. See Hold Mode Light on page 180.

When hold mode is activated, the transaxle isfixed in the gear selected.

Hold Mode Features

Winter FunctionSelect hold mode while in AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D4) to help the vehicle maintaintraction on slippery road surfaces, such as snow,mud, or ice.

Manually Controlling ShiftSelect hold mode to use your automatic transaxlelike a three-speed manual transaxle.

115

Manual Transaxle Operation

Five-Speed

This is your shift pattern.

Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shiftinto FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),

put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on theclutch. Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the sameway you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, andshift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever andshift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

116

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thebucket seats.

117

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 163.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushingthe release button on the front of the shfiter.

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

118

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P). If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, theweight of the vehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transaxle. You mayfind it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on page 118.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

119

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your automatic transaxle vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift-lock control system. You have tofully apply your regular brakes before you can shiftfrom PARK (P) when the ignition is turned toON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation onpage 112.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holdingthe brake pedal down, try this:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.

3. Remove the cover over the shift-lock releaseslot by prying it off using a small, flat object.The shift-lock release slot is located at the topof the shift lever.

4. Insert the key into the shift-lock release slotand press and hold the key.

5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

6. Remove the key from the shift-lock releaseslot, insert the key into the ignition and startthe engine.

7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.

8. Apply and hold the regular brake fullyand release the parking brake.

9. Shift to the gear you want.

10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

120

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transaxle)Before leaving your vehicle, do the following:

1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly applythe parking brake.

2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and placethe shift lever into the gear position asstated below:

• When parking on level ground, place theshift lever into NEUTRAL.

• When parking downhill, place the shift leverin REVERSE (R).

• When parking uphill, place the shift leverin FIRST (1).

3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK,remove the key and release the clutch.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

121

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

122

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. Butif you ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 122.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 243.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transaxle shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to. Ifyou have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transaxle shiftlever to PARK (P), or the manual transaxleshift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. If you have an automatic transaxle,see Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 118.

123

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side. The control atthe bottom of the mirror is the day/night featurethat allows adjustment to the mirror so thatthe glare of headlamps from behind is reduced.Push the control for daytime use; pull it fornight use.

Outside Manual MirrorsThe outside rearview mirrors should be adjustedso you can see a little of the side of yourvehicle when you are sitting in a comfortabledriving position.

Adjust the outside manual mirrors using thecontrol lever located next to the mirror.

The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flatagainst the side of the vehicle by pushingthem toward the vehicle’s doors.

124

Outside Power Mirror

For sedan models, thecontrol for the powermirrors is located on theinstrument panel, leftof the steering wheel.

To adjust the mirrors, do the following:

1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by movingthe selector switch to L for the driver’s sidemirror or R for the passenger’s side mirror.

2. To adjust the mirror, press the correspondingedges located on the four-way control pad tomove the mirror in the direction that youwant it to go - up, down, left or right.The ignition must be turned to ON to adjustthe mirrors.

For hatchback models,the control for the powermirror is located onthe driver’s door panel,above the powerwindow buttons.

1. Select the mirror you want to adjust bypressing the left side of the selector switch forthe driver’s side mirror or the right side forthe passenger’s side mirror.

2. To adjust each mirror, press the correspondingedges located on the four-way control pad tomove the mirror in the direction that youwant it to go. The ignition must be turned toON to adjust the mirrors.

The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flatagainst the side of the vehicle by pushingthem toward the vehicle’s doors.

125

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things,like other vehicles, look farther away than theyreally are.

Outside Heated MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, when you operatethe rear window defogger, the heated driver’sand passenger’s outside power mirrors arewarmed to help clear them of ice, snow, and

condensation. See “Rear Window and OutsideMirror Defogger” under Climate Control System onpage 150 for more information.

Storage Areas

Your vehicle has shopping hooks on each frontseatback for your convenience. Lift the headrestto access the hooks.

126

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling up on the bottom ofthe handle.

Cupholder(s)

There are two cupholders located in the centerinstrument panel, below the climate control system.To use the cupholder, push in on its outer edge.Then pull out the cupholder. After use, push in thecupholder until it latches.

There is also a cupholder located in the rear ofthe center console.

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

If your vehicle has this feature, the sunglassesstorage compartment is located above the driver’sdoor. To open, pull down and hold the upperpart of the cover. To close the compartment, letgo of the cover and the compartment willautomatically close.

127

Sunroof

If the vehicle has thisfeature, the switch islocated on the headlinerbetween the sunvisors.

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition isturned to ON. The sunroof can be opened to avent position or it can be opened all of the way.

You must manually open and close the sunshade.

To open the sunroof to the vent position, open thesunshade. Then press and hold the driver’sside of the switch. To close the sunroof, press andhold the passenger’s side of the switch until thesunroof reaches the desired position.

To fully open the sunroof, open the sunshade.Then press and hold the passenger’s side of theswitch. To close the sunroof, press and holdthe driver’s side of the switch. The sunroof will stopif the switch is released during operation.

In both the vent and fully open positions, the airflow can be adjusted by pushing and holdingthe switch until the sunroof moves to the desiredposition.

The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

128

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 132Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 135Other Warning Devices ............................. 136Horn .......................................................... 136Tilt Wheel .................................................. 136Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 137Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 138Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 138Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 139Windshield Wipers ..................................... 139Windshield Washer .................................... 140Rear Window Wiper/Washer (Hatchback) ... 141Cruise Control ........................................... 141Exterior Lamps .......................................... 144Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 145Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 145Fog Lamps ................................................ 146Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 146Dome Lamp .............................................. 147Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ............... 147Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 147Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 148Clock ......................................................... 149

Climate Controls ......................................... 150Climate Control System ............................. 150Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 154Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 154

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 156Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 156Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 159Trip Odometer ........................................... 159Tachometer ............................................... 159Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 160Safety Belt Reminder Tone ....................... 160Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 160Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

(Sedan) .................................................. 161Charging System Light .............................. 163Brake System Warning Light ..................... 163Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 164Hold Mode Light ........................................ 165Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 165Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 166Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 169Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 170

Section 3 Instrument Panel

129

Cruise Control Light .................................. 171Highbeam On Light ................................... 171Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ........................................ 171Door Ajar Light .......................................... 172Fuel Gage ................................................. 172Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 173

Secondary Information Center (SIC) .......... 174Secondary Information Center (SIC)

(Hatchback Only) ................................... 174Clock (Hatchback Only) ............................. 175Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 175Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 176Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

(Hatchback) ............................................ 177Charging System Light .............................. 179Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 179Hold Mode Light ........................................ 180Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 180

Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 184Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 185Door Ajar Light .......................................... 185

Audio System(s) ......................................... 186AM-FM Radio (Single Display,

Base Level) ........................................... 187AM-FM Radio (Double Display,

Base Level) ........................................... 189Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) ....................... 193Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA) ......... 200Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) ...... 207Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-Disc

Player) ................................................... 211Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 215Radio Reception ........................................ 216Care of Your CDs ..................................... 216Care of the CD Player .............................. 216Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback) ............... 217Backglass Antenna (Sedan) ....................... 217

Section 3 Instrument Panel

130

✍ NOTES

131

Instrument Panel Overview

Hatchback Shown

132

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 154.B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 156.C. Digital Clock and Secondary Information

Center. See Clock on page 149 and SecondaryInformation Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)on page 174.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 135.

E. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 146.

F. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 274.

G. Horn. See Horn on page 136.H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 186.I. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 127.J. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

on page 148.K. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette

Lighter on page 148.L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 150.M. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 127.

133

Sedan Shown

134

The main components of your instrument panelare the following:A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 154.B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 156.C. Digital Clock. See Clock on page 149.D. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 274.E. Horn. See Horn on page 136.F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 186.G. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 150.H. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

on page 148.I. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 127.J. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette

Lighter on page 148.K. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 135.L. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 127.

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel on thesedan. It is locatedto the right of theclimate control systemon the hatchback.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

135

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelYour vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you toadjust the steering wheel before you drive.You can raise it to the highest level to give yourlegs more room when you exit and enter thevehicle.

The tilt wheel lever islocated underneath thesteering columnslightly to the left.

To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and pushthe lever down. Then, move the wheel to acomfortable position and pull the lever up to lockthe wheel in place.

136

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 138.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 138.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 139.

• P Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lampson page 144.

• - Fog Lamps, if equipped. See Fog Lamps onpage 146.

Uplevel shown, Base similar

137

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash in thedirection of the turnor lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned outand other drivers will not see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andthen check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 356.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction leveraway from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on if theignition is turned to ON.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

138

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

Use this lever located on the right side of thesteering wheel to operate the windshield wipers.The ignition must be turned to ON to operatethe windshield wipers.

HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this positionfor wiping at high speed.

LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this positionfor steady wiping at low speed.

Sedan shown, Hatchback similar

139

INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this positionto choose a delayed wiping cycle.

OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off thewindshield wipers.

Misting FunctionMove the lever toward INT for a single wipingcycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers start;then let go. The windshield wipers will stop afterone wipe. If you want more wipes, hold theband toward INT longer.

Remember that damaged wiper blades mayprevent you from seeing well enough to drivesafely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice andsnow from the wiper blades before using them.

If they are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomedamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload.

Windshield WasherTo wash your windshield, pull the windshieldwasher/wiper lever toward you with the ignitionturned to ON.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the lever, the washers will stop,but the wipers will continue to wipe for severalcycles and will either stop or will resume atthe speed you were using before.

140

Rear Window Wiper/Washer(Hatchback)

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Your vehicle may have a rear windowwasher/wiper. Operate the rear windowwasher/wiper system by pushing the windshieldwasher/wiper lever away from you. The wiperoperates intermittently when the lever is in the firstposition. Washer fluid sprays onto the rearwindow and the wiper operates continuously whenthe lever is pushed to the second position.

The rear window washer uses the same fluidbottle as the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash yourwindshield but not your rear window, check thefluid level.

Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintaina speed of about 24 mph (39 km/h) or morewithout keeping your foot on the accelerator. Thiscan really help on long trips. Cruise controldoes not work at speeds below 24 mph (39 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, or the clutchpedal if you have a manual transaxle, the cruisecontrol turns off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

141

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

The cruise control padis located on the rightside of the steeringwheel.

1. Press the ON-OFF button (A) to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Accelerate to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET button and release it. Thecruise control light will come on in theinstrument panel cluster to show that thecruise control is on.

4. Take your foot off the accelerate pedal.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake pedal, orthe clutch pedal if you have a manual transaxle.This, of course, shuts off the cruise control.But you do not need to reset it. Once you aregoing about 24 mph (39 km/h) or more, you canbriefly press the RESUME button.

You will go right back up to your chosen speedand stay there.

If you hold in the RESUME button longer, thevehicle will keep going faster until you release thebutton or apply the brake pedal. So unless youwant to go faster, do not hold in the RESUMEbutton.

142

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higherspeed. Press the SET button, then releasethe button and the accelerator pedal. You willnow cruise at the higher speed.

• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there untilyou get up to the speed you want, and thenrelease the button. To increase your speed invery small amounts, briefly press theRESUME button and then release it. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

The accelerate feature will only work after you turnon the cruise control by pressing the SET button.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press the SET button until you reach thelower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the SET button. Each time you dothis, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

143

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you mayhave to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you mayhave to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the brakepedal takes you out of cruise control. Many driversfind this to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or pressthe clutch pedal, if you have a manualtransaxle.

• Press the ON OFF button on the cruisecontrol pad.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band has three positions:

3 (Headlamps): Turn the band to this position toturn on the headlamps, together with the following:

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamp

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Parking Lamps

Uplevel shown, Base similar

144

The headlamps will automatically turn off when theignition key is turned to LOCK or ACC.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the band to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps, together withthe taillamps, license plate lamp, and instrumentpanel lights.

OFF: Turn the band to this position to turnall lamps off, except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignitionturned to LOCK or ACC while leaving the lampson, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your low-beamheadlamps come on when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in theparking lamp position.

• The parking brake is released.

An indicator light on instrument panel cluster willcome on when the DRL system is on.

When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, parking lamps and instrumentpanel lights will not be illuminated unless youhave turned the exterior lamps control tothe parking lamp or headlamp position.

The DRL system will turn off when one of thefollowing conditions are met:

• The ignition is off.

• The parking brake is on.

• The high-beam headlamps are on.

• The low-beam headlamps are on.

• The flash-to-pass feature is used.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

145

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for bettervisibility in foggy or misty conditions. The bandlocated on the middle of the turn signal/multifunction lever controls the fog lamps.

While using the fog lamps, the ignition must beturned to ON and the low-beam headlampsor parking lamps must be on.

Turn the band to ON to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light will come on in the secondaryinformation center on the hatchback or in theinstrument panel cluster on the sedan, when thefog lamps are on. See Fog Lamp Light onpage 185.

Turn the band to OFF to turn the fog lamps off.The fog lamps will also turn off when thehigh-beam headlamps are turned on. When thehigh-beam headlamps are turned off, the fog lampswill turn on again.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel for this feature is located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steeringcolumn. Turn the thumbwheel to brighten or dimthe lights.

Hatchback Sedan

146

Dome LampYour vehicle will have one of the following domelamp switches.

The switches have three positions.

ON: The light comes on and stays on.

O (Door): The light comes on when a door isopened. The light turns off when all the doorsare closed.

OFF: The light remains off even when a dooris opened.

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’sbattery against drainage from the taillamps, licenseplate lamps, instrument panel lights, and parkinglamps. When the ignition is turned off, the power tothese features will automatically turn off after5 seconds once the driver’s door is closed.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With the accessory power outlet, you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located next to theparking brake on the center console.

To use the outlet, remove the protective cap.When not in use, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap. The accessory power outlet isoperational when the ignition is turned to ACCor ON.

Without Sunroof

With Sunroof

147

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory or

accessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe ashtray is located at the lower part ofthe center instrument panel. To remove the frontashtray for cleaning, open the ashtray fully,press in the retaining tab and pull the bin out.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

The cigarette lighter is located to the right of thefront ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC orON, push the cigarette lighter in all the way andlet go. When it is ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

148

ClockIf you have a sedan there is a digital clock locatedin the center of the instrument panel, above thecenter air outlets. When the ignition is turnedto ACC or ON, the time is displayed in the digitalclock. There are three adjusting buttons forthe digital clock:

H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press theH button once. To go forward more than one hour,press and hold the button until the correct houris reached.

M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press theM button once. To go forward more thanone minute, press and hold the button until thecorrect minute is reached.

S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour,press the S button.

For example, if the set button is pressed while thetime is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to8:00. If this button is pressed while the time isbetween 8:30 and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.

After disconnecting the battery or replacing thefuse, reset the clock.

If you have a hatchback there is a clock located inthe Secondary Information Center (SIC), seeSecondary Information Center (SIC) (HatchbackOnly) on page 174.

149

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

Temperature Control: Turn the left knobclockwise or counterclockwise to manuallyincrease or decrease the temperature inside yourvehicle. Turn the knob to the blue area for coolair and to the red area for warm air.

9 (Fan): Turn the middle knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. In any setting other than off, the fanwill run continuously with the ignition on. The fanmust be on in order for the air conditioningcompressor to run.

Uplevel shown, Base similar, Hatchback only

Uplevel shown, Base similar, Sedan only

150

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing from the right knob:

Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of theair to the instrument panel outlets, and thendirects the remaining air to the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets. Some of the air will also bedirected to the rear outlets. Be sure to keep thearea under the front seats clear to allow the flow ofair to the rear compartment.

The right knob can also be used to select thedefog and defrost modes. Information on defoggingand defrosting can be found later in this section.

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside airfrom coming into the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors from entering yourvehicle or to help heat or cool the air insideyour vehicle more quickly.

If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevelmodel), press the button to turn the recirculationmode on. When the button is pressed, an indicator

light in the button will come on. Press the buttonagain to return to outside air mode.

If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move thelever to choose the recirculation mode.

Using the recirculation mode for extended periodsmay cause your windows to fog. If this happens,select the defrost mode.

: (Outside Air): This mode brings outside airinto the vehicle.

If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevelmodel), press the button until the recirculationmode is turned off. Your vehicle will then return tooutside air mode.

If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move thelever to choose the outside air mode.

A/C (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has airconditioning, follow these steps to use the system.Start the engine and set the fan control knob to thedesired speed. The air conditioning compressordoes not operate when the fan control knob is in theoff position. Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning compressor on and off. When the A/Cbutton is pressed, an indicator light in the buttonwill come on to let you know that air conditioningis activated.

151

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Press the A/C button.

4. Select the recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity or moisture condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There are twomodes to clear fog or frost from your windshield.Use the defog mode to clear the windows offog or moisture and warm the passengers. Usethe defrost mode to remove fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly.

For best results, clear all snow and ice from thewindshield before defrosting.

Select one of these available modes from theright knob.

0 (Defog): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the floor outlets. A smallamount of air is also directed to the outboardoutlets for the side windows and to the instrumentpanel side outlets. When you select this mode,the system runs the air-conditioning compressor.To defog the windows faster, turn the temperaturecontrol knob clockwise to the warmest setting.

152

1 (Defrost): This mode directs the air to thewindshield and the outboard outlets for theside windows. A small amount of air is alsodirected to the instrument panel side outlets. Whenyou select this mode, the system runs theair-conditioning compressor. To defrost thewindows faster, turn the temperature control knobclockwise to the warmest setting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

Rear Window and Outside MirrorDefoggerYour vehicle may have a rear window and outsidemirror defogger. This feature will only workwhen the ignition is turned to ON.

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.Before using this feature, clear as much snowfrom the rear window as possible.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window and outside mirrordefogger on or off. An indicator light in the buttonwill come on to let you know that the feature isactivated.

If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, therear window defogger will remain on until thebutton is pressed again or the engine is turned off.

If your vehicle has air conditioning, the rearwindow defogger will turn off about 10 minutesafter the button is pressed. The defogger can alsobe turned off by pressing the button again or byturning the engine off.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

153

Outlet AdjustmentTo open an outlet, press on its cover. Turn thecover to change the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterYour vehicle may have a passenger compartmentair filter. It is located behind the glove box andcan be accessed after removing the glovebox from its housing.

The filter traps most of the pollen from air enteringthe module. Like your engine’s air cleaner/filter,it may need to be changed periodically.

To change the passenger compartment air filter,use the following steps:

1. Open the glove box halfway down.

2. Grip the glove box by both the upper andlower sides and pull it out of its housing.

154

3. Remove the four screws on the knee bolster.

4. Remove the knee bolster.

5. Then reverse the steps to install the new airfilter and replace the glove box.View the air flow arrows on the filter beforeinstalling to ensure you install the filtercorrectly.

155

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asthe details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. Ifyou are familiar with this section, you shouldnot be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your vehicle’s warninglights and gages. They can be a big help.

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let youknow at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, how much fuelyou are using, and many other things you will needto drive safely and economically.

156

Your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained onthe following pages.

United States Hatchback shown, Canada Hatchback similar

157

United States Automatic Transaxle Sedan shown, Canada Manual Transaxle Sedan similar

158

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles (used in the UnitedStates) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can record the number of miles,used in the United States, or kilometers, used inCanada, traveled for up to two trips.

You can cycle between the odometer and tripodometers A and B by pressing the reset buttonlocated in the lower right area of the speedometer.By pressing the reset button, you can tell howmany miles or kilometers have been recorded oneither Trip A or Trip B since you last set thetrip odometer back to zero.

To reset each trip odometer to zero, press andhold the reset button. The reset button resets onlythe trip odometer that is being displayed. Eachtrip odometer must be reset individually.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays your engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine above6,500 rpm, your vehicle could be damaged,and the damages would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not operate the engine with thetachometer above 6,500 rpm.

Hatchback Sedan

159

Safety Belt Reminder Light

The safety belt light willcome on and stay onuntil the driver’ssafety belt is buckled.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light willnot come on.

Safety Belt Reminder ToneIf your vehicle has this feature, a tone will soundfor several seconds when the ignition is turnedto ON to remind people to fasten their safety belts.The tone will not sound if the driver’s safety beltis already buckled.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag sensor, theairbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For more informationon the airbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 68.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

160

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator(Sedan)Your vehicle has a passenger airbag statusindicator.

If you have a sedan, the airbag off symbol will bevisible near the clock, located in the center ofthe instrument panel, during the system check.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightfor several seconds as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, if the off symbol is lit onthe passenger airbag status indicator, it meansthat the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped). See PassengerSensing System on page 77 for more on this,including important safety information.

United States – Sedan Canada – Sedan

161

If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag(if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the off symbol in the passenger airbagstatus indicator does not come on whenyou have a rear-facing child restraintinstalled in the right front passenger’s seat,it means that the passenger sensingsystem has not turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag or airbags inflate.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag or airbags. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat unless the airbag orairbags have been turned off.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag and sideairbag (if equipped). See AirbagReadiness Light on page 176 for more onthis, including important safetyinformation.

162

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and the engineis not running, as acheck to show you it isworking.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you havea brake problem.

Hatchback and CanadaSedan

U.S. Sedan Only

163

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 258.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when the ignition is turnedto ON and may stay on for several seconds.That is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Ifthe light comes on, stop as soon as possibleand turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer.

164

If the regular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not haveanti-lock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, you do not have anti-lockbrakes and there is a problem with your regularbrakes. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 163.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to ON. This is normal. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Hold Mode Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, this light willcome on when the holdmode is active.

If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehiclechecked. See “Hold Mode” under AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 112 for additionalinformation on this feature.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

United States Hatchback Canada Hatchback

United States Sedan Canada Sedan

165

Your vehicle has an engine coolant temperaturegage. With the ignition turned to ON, this gageshows the engine coolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the red area, yourengine is too hot. It means that your enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 290.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptable

levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The Check Engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or replacement tires that do notmatch your vehicle’s original tires can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 264.

166

When the ignition is on, this light should come onand should go out after a few seconds as acheck to show you it is working. If the light doesnot come on, have it repaired.

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

167

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 269.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 266. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

168

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theCheck Engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving.If you have done this and your vehicle still doesnot pass the inspection for lack of OBD systemreadiness, your dealer can prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when youare driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

169

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working. The light will goout when you turn the ignition on. If it doesnot come on with the ignition on, youmay have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Fog Lamp Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the fog lampslight will come onwhen the fog lampsare in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 146 for moreinformation.

170

Cruise Control Light

If your vehicle hascruise control, this lightcomes on wheneveryou set your cruisecontrol.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 141for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever the highbeamheadlamps are on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 138 for additional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light will come onwhen the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)are on.

A flashing DRL light indicates a possible burnedout headlamp, or that the vehicle may need serviceto repair a defective DRL relay. See your dealer.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) onpage 145 for more information.

171

Door Ajar Light

The door ajar light willcome on whenever adoor is opened,regardless of the ignitionposition.

If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s dooris open, you will also hear a warning chime.

Fuel Gage

United States Hatchback Canada Hatchback

United States Sedan Canada Sedan

172

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel youhave left when the ignition is turned to ON.

When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warninglight will come on. You still have a little fuelleft, but you should get more soon. See Low FuelWarning Light on page 172 for more information.

Here are four things that some owners askabout. None of these show a problem with yourfuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full, butit actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes onwhen the vehicle is lowon fuel.

The low fuel warning light comes on when there isapproximately 1.7 gallons (6.0 liters) of fuelremaining in the tank.

To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. SeeFilling the Tank on page 269.

173

Secondary Information Center (SIC)

Secondary Information Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)

United States shown, Canada similar

174

The secondary information center (SIC) displayssome of the warning lights and indicators. The SICis located in the center of the instrument panel,above the center air outlets. The digital clockis also located in the center of the SIC. See Clock(Hatchback Only) on page 174 and InstrumentPanel Overview on page 132 for more information.

Clock (Hatchback Only)Your vehicle has a digital clock. The clock islocated in the secondary instrument cluster onthe center of the instrument panel, abovethe center air outlets. When the ignition is turnedto ACC or ON, the time is displayed in thedigital clock. There are two adjusting buttons forthe digital clock:

H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press theH button once. To go forward more than one hour,press and hold the button until the correct houris reached.

M (Minute): To go forward one minute, pressthe M button once. To go forward more thanone minute, press and hold the button until thecorrect minute is reached.

After disconnecting the battery or replacing thefuse, reset the clock.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

The safety belt light willcome on and stay onuntil the driver’ssafety belt is buckled.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working.

175

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theSecondary Information Center (SIC), which showsthe airbag symbol. The system checks theairbag’s electrical system for malfunctions. Thelight tells you if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag sensor, theairbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For more informationon the airbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 68.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on or flashes when youare driving, your airbag system may not workproperly. Have your vehicle serviced right away byyour dealer.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition to ON. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

176

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator(Hatchback)Your vehicle has a passenger airbag statusindicator.

If you have a hatchback, the airbag off symbol willbe visible in the Secondary Information Center(SIC) during the system check.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightfor several seconds as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, if the off symbol is lit onthe passenger airbag status indicator, it meansthat the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped). See PassengerSensing System on page 77 for more on this,including important safety information.United

States – HatchbackCanada – Hatchback

177

If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag(if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the off symbol in the passenger airbagstatus indicator does not come on whenyou have a rear-facing child restraintinstalled in the right front passenger’s seat,it means that the passenger sensingsystem has not turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag or airbags inflate.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag or airbags. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat unless the airbag orairbags have been turned off.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag and side airbag (if equipped). SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

178

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and the engineis not running, as acheck to show you it isworking.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when the ignition is turnedto ON and may stay on for several seconds.That is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. If thelight comes on, stop as soon as possible and turnthe ignition off. Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on, or comes onagain while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. See your dealer/retailer. If the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you still havebrakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on, youdo not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 163.

179

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to ON. This is normal. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Hold Mode Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, this light willcome on when the holdmode is active.

If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehiclechecked. See “Hold Mode” under AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 112 for additionalinformation on this feature.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The Check Engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel

180

economy might not be as good, and theengine might not run as smoothly. This couldlead to costly repairs that might not becovered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or replacement tires that do notmatch your vehicle’s original tires can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 264.

When the ignition is on, this light should come onand should go out after a few seconds as acheck to show you it is working. If the light doesnot come on, have it repaired.

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

181

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 269.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

182

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 266. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theCheck Engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving.If you have done this and your vehicle still doesnot pass the inspection for lack of OBD systemreadiness, your dealer can prepare the vehicle forinspection.

183

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when youare driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working. The light will goout when you turn the ignition on. If it doesnot come on with the ignition on, youmay have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

184

Fog Lamp Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the fog lampslight will come onwhen the fog lamps arein use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 146 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

The door ajar light willcome on whenever adoor is opened,regardless of the ignitionposition.

If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s dooris open, you will also hear a warning chime.

185

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 220. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

186

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer/retailer.Also, check federal rules covering mobile radioand telephone units. If sound equipment canbe added, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment can interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them. Yourvehicle’s systems can interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

AM-FM Radio (Single Display,Base Level)

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon or off.

u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. VOL will appear on thedisplay.

187

Finding a Station

AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.

p (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

t u (Scan): Press this knob until SCANflashes on the display, then press either the upor the down arrow buttons to determine thedirection for the radio to scan the stations. Theradio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next station. Press eitherarrow button again to stop scanning.

The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for longer than two seconds.Ch will appear on the display when the stationhas been set. Whenever that numberedpushbutton is pressed, the station that wasset will return.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

f (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASappears on the display. Then turn the volume knobto increase or to decrease the bass. The displaywill show the bass level.

Press this button until TRE appears on thedisplay. Then turn the volume knob to increase orto decrease the treble. The display will showthe treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,decrease the treble.

188

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)f (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL appears on the display. Thenturn the volume knob to increase or to decreasethe balance between the right and the leftspeakers. The display will show the balance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and therear speakers, press this button until FAD appearson the display. Then turn the volume knob toincrease or to decrease the fade between the frontand the rear speakers. The display will show thefade level.

AM-FM Radio (Double Display,Base Level)

Playing the RadioO(Power/Volume): Press and release this knobto turn the system on. Press and hold this knobfor more than two seconds to turn the system off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

When the system is on, press and release thisknob to mute the system. Press and release thisknob again to turn the sound back on.

189

The previous volume setting is maintainedwhenever the radio is turned on. The volume canbe adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

AM/AUX: Press this button to play an AM stationwhile a portable audio device is playing. Pressthis button again and the system will begin playingaudio from the connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is not connected,“no input device found” will be displayed.

FM: Press this button to switch between FM1 orFM2. The display will show the selection.

¦¥ SEEK: Press the up or down SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

() TUNE: Press the up or down TUNE arrowto go to the next or to the previous radio station.

SCAN: Push and release this button to scan radiostations. The radio will go to a station, play for afew seconds, then go on to the next station.

Push this button again to stop scanning.

The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A andsix AM1, six AM2, six AM-A), can be programmedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performingthe following steps:


2. Press AM/AUX to select AM1, AM2, or AM-A.Press FM to select FM1, FM2 or FM-A.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for longer than two seconds.The channel number (CH#1 through CH#6)will flash on the display when the stationhas been set. Whenever that numbered presetbutton is pressed, the station that was setwill return.

5. Repeat the first four steps for each presetbutton.

190

AST (Automatic Store): Six FM1 preset stationswith the strongest reception in the region canbe automatically stored. Press the AST button forlonger than one second. The display will showAUTO SCANNING and then SCANNING will flashon display. Once the stations are stored, theradio will switch to FM1 and the first preset stationwill begin to play. FM-A will appear on thedisplay when listening to the automatic storedstations. Press the AM or FM button to cancelautomatic store.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is BASS,MID, TRE, FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press thisbutton until BAS appears on the display. Turn thepower/volume knob to increase or to decreasethe bass. The display will show the basslevel. When finished making the selection, pressthis button to select the bass level.

Press this button until MID appears on the display.Turn the power/volume knob to increase or todecrease the midrange. The display will showthe midrange level. When finished makingthe selection, press this button to select themidrange level.

Press this button until TRE appears on thedisplay. Turn the power/volume knob to increaseor to decrease the treble. The display willshow the treble level. When finished making theselection, press this button to select the treblelevel. If a station is weak or there is static,decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL appears on the display. Turnthe power/volume knob to increase or to decrease.The display will show the balance level. Whenfinished making the selection, press this button toselect the balance level.

191

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD appearson the display. Turn the power/volume knobto increase or to decrease the fade between thefront and the rear speakers. The display willshow the fade level. When finished making theselection, press this button to select the fade level.

Setting the EQ (Equalization)

SOUND (Equalization): Press this button untilEQ OFF appears on the display to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forclassic, dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice, and techno.Turn the power/volume knob until the desiredequalization setting appears on the display. Whenfinished making the selection, press the SOUNDbutton to select the equalization setting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF appears on thedisplay, turn the power/volume knob until OFFappears on the display, then press the SOUNDbutton again to select the equalization setting.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,TECHNO, and EQ OFF.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): Your radio system hasan auxiliary input jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is not an audiooutput; do not plug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack. You can however,connect an external audio device such as an iPod,laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, orXM™ receiver, etc. to the auxiliary input jack foruse as another source for audio listening.

The auxiliary input jack will also accept cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector intothe auxiliary input jack to hear the other side of acell phone’s conversation through the vehiclesound system.

192

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in park (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 220 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, turn theportable audio player on. Press and hold the radioAM/AUX button for more than two seconds oruntil audio from the device begins to play over thecar speakers.

O(Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume is not loud or soft enough.

AM/AUX: Press this button to listen to theradio while a portable audio device is playing.The portable audio device will continue playing,so you may want to stop it or turn it off.

Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)




193

Finding a Station

AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.The display shows the selection.

FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.The display shows the selection.

() TUNE: Press the up ( or down )

TUNE arrow to select radio stations.

Press the up ( TUNE arrow to increase or thedown ) to decrease the radio frequencies.

¥ SEEK: Press the up ¦ or down ¥ SEEKarrow to seek radio stations.

Press the up ¦ SEEK arrow to seek the nextradio station or the down ¥ SEEK arrow to seekthe previous radio station.

SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning.

The radio scans stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

AST (Automatic Store)Six FM1 preset stations with the strongestreception in the region can be automatically stored.Press the AST button for more than two seconds.The display shows AUTO SCANNING andthen SCANNING flashes on the display. Once thestations are stored, the radio switches to FM1and the first preset station begins to play. FM-Adisplays while listening to the automatic storedstations. Press the AM or FM button to cancelautomatic store.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 24 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM1, andsix AM2), can be programmed on the six numberedbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1,FM2, AM1 or AM2.


194

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedbuttons for more than two seconds. The presetbutton number one through six flashes on thedisplay when the station has been set. Whenthat numbered preset button is pressed, thatpreset station returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each presetbutton.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is BASS,TRE, BAL, FADE, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass,Treble, Fade, Balance, Equalization Off,and Volume).

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button untilBAS (bass) displays. Turn theO knob to increaseor to decrease the bass. The display shows thebass level. After making the selection, pressthis button to set the bass level selection.

Press this button until TRE (treble) displays. TurntheO knob to increase or to decrease thetreble. The display shows the treble level. Aftermaking the selection, press this button to setthe treble level selection. If a station is weak orhas static, decrease the treble.


SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, pressthis button until BAL (balance) displays. TurntheO knob to increase or to decrease. Thedisplay shows the balance level. After makingthe selection, press this button to set thebalance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD (fade)displays. Turn theO knob to increase or todecrease the fade between the front and the rearspeakers. The display shows the fade level.After making the selection, press this button to setthe fade level.

195

Setting the EqualizationThe order for displayed customized equalizationsettings are EQ OFF, CLASSIC, DANCE,ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE, TECHNO, EQ OFF.

SOUND (Equalization): Press this buttonuntil EQ OFF (equalization) displays to selectcustomized equalization settings designedfor classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice andtechno. Turn theO knob until the desiredequalization setting displays. After making theselection, press the SOUND button to setthe equalization setting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF displays, turn theO knob until OFF displays, then press theSOUND button again to set the equalizationsetting.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. Insert a CD with the ignition off.

When a CD is inserted, CDP displays. As the CD isloading, Filecheck displays. As each new trackstarts to play, Track and the track number displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When a CD is inthe player and the ignition is turned on, theradio must be turned on before the CD startsplayback. When the ignition and radio are turnedon, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 216 for more information.

196

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat thecurrent track. RPT displays. Press this buttonagain to turn off repeat play.

3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM displays. Press this button again to turn offrandom play.

4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to thefirst few seconds of each track on each loaded CD.INTRO displays. To stop scanning press thisbutton again. The current track begins to play.

() TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press theup ( TUNE arrow to go to the next track.The track number displays. Press the down )

TUNE arrow to go to the start of the current track.The player continues moving forward or backwardthrough the CD with each press of the up ordown arrows.

AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. CDP displays when the CDplayer has been selected. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

Press this button while a CD is playing to pausethe CD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Pressthis button again to start playing the CD.

197

EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. This isthe only way a CD can be ejected from the player.The CD can eject when the ignition or the radiois turned off.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscIf you have a radio with a single CD (MP3), it iscapable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc.For more information on how to play an MP3/WMACD-R disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.See Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) onpage 207 or Using an MP3 (Radio withSix-Disc Player) on page 211 later in thissection.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

198

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output. Do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.An external audio device such as an iPod,laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, orcassette tape player, etc. can be connected to theauxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector into theauxiliary input jack to hear a person speakingon a cell phone during conversation through thevehicle sound system.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 220 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. While a device is connected, turn theportable audio player on and press the radioCD/AUX button to hear audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button onceto play a CD while a portable audio device isplaying. Press this button a second time for thesystem to begin playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. Once in this mode,“Auxinput” appears on the display. If the auxiliaryjack does not detect the presence of an outputjack, the auxiliary mode does not display.

O (Power/Volume): Turn theO knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additionaladjustments on a portable device might be neededto get the desired volume.

199

Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA)




Finding a Station

AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.The display shows the selection.

FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.The display shows the selection.

() TUNE: Press the up ( or down )

TUNE arrow to select radio stations.

Press the up ( TUNE arrow to increase or thedown ) to decrease the radio frequencies.

¥ SEEK: Press the up ¦ or down ¥ SEEKarrow to seek radio stations.

Press the up ¦ SEEK arrow to seek the nextradio station or the down ¥ SEEK arrow to seekthe previous radio station.

SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

200

AST (Automatic Store)Six FM1 preset stations with the strongestreception in the region can be automatically stored.Press the AST button for more than one second.The display shows AUTO SCANNING andthen SCANNING flashes on the display. Once thestations are stored, the radio switches to FM1and the first preset station begins to play. FM-Adisplays while listening to the automatic storedstations. Press the AM or FM button to cancelautomatic store.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A,six AM1, six AM2, and six AM-A), can beprogrammed on the six numbered buttons, byperforming the following steps:


2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1,FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, or AM-A.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for more than two seconds.

The channel number (CH#1 through CH#6)flashes on the display when the stationhas been set. When that numbered presetbutton is pressed, that preset station returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each presetbutton.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is BASS,TRE, FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass, Treble,Fade, Balance, Equalization Off, and Volume).

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press thisbutton until BAS (bass) displays. Turn theO knobto increase or to decrease the bass. The displayshows the bass level. After making the selection,press this button to select the bass level.

Press this button until MID (midrange) displays.Turn theO knob to increase or to decreasethe midrange. The display shows the midrangelevel. After making the selection, press this buttonto select the midrange level.

201

Press this button until TRE (treble) displays. TurntheO knob to increase or to decrease thetreble. The display shows the treble level. Aftermaking the selection, press this button toselect the treble level. If a station is weak or hasstatic, decrease the treble.


SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL (balance) displays. Turn theO knob to increase or to decrease the balance.The display shows the balance level. Aftermaking the selection, press this button to selectthe balance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD (fade)displays. Turn theO knob to increase or todecrease the fade between the front and the rearspeakers. The display shows the fade level.After making the selection, press this button toselect the fade level.

Setting the EQ (Equalization)

SOUND (Equalization): Press this button untilEQ OFF (equalization) displays to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forclassic, dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice, and techno.Turn theO knob until the desired equalizationsetting displays. After making the selection, pressthe SOUND button to select the equalizationsetting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF displays. Turn theO knob until OFF displays, then press theSOUND button again to select the equalizationsetting.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,TECHNO, and EQ OFF.

202

Playing a CD(s)

LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

1. Press and release the load button. A messageto select a slot number from 1 through 6displays.

2. Press the desired slot number. Wait for themessage to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and amessage to load multiple discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the LOAD button again to cancelloading more CDs.

As each CD is inserted, CDP displays. As eachCD is loading, Filecheck displays.

Once playback begins, the track and track numberdisplays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. While a CD is inthe player and the ignition is turned on, theradio must be turned on before the current CDstarts playback. When the ignition and radioare turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD does not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 216 for more information.

203





2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat thecurrent track. RPT displays. Press this buttonagain to turn off repeat play.

3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM displays.

Press this button again to turn off random play.

4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the firstfew seconds of each track on each loaded CD.INTRO displays. To stop scanning press thisbutton again. The current track begins to play.

5 DSC − (Previous CDC): Press this button to goback to the start of the previous CDC.

6 DSC + (Next CDC): Press this button to goforward to the start of the next CDC.



AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

204

CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. CDP displays when the CDplayer has been selected. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

Press this button while a CD is playing to pausethe CD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Pressthis button again to start playing the CD.

EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. Pressand hold this button to eject all CDs. This isthe only way a CD can be ejected from the player.The CD can eject when the ignition or the radiois turned off.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscIf your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, it is capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-Rdisc. For more information on how to play anMP3/WMA disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.See “Using an MP3” later in this section.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

205

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): The radio system hasan auxiliary input jack located on the lowerright side of the faceplate. This is not an audiooutput. Do not plug the headphone set intothe front auxiliary input jack. An external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™ receiver, etc.can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for useas another source for audio listening.

The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector into theauxiliary input jack to hear a person speck on acell phone during a conversation through thevehicle sound system.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 220 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. While a device is connected, turn theportable audio player on and press the radioCD/AUX button to hear audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn theO knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additionaladjustments on a portable device might be neededto get the desired volume.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button onceto play a CD while a portable audio device isplaying. Press this button a second time for thesystem to begin playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. Once in this mode,“Auxinput” displays. If the auxiliary jack does notdetect the presence of an output jack, the auxiliarymode does not display.

206

Using an MP3 (Radio withCD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R Disc

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or.wma extension, other file extensions mightnot work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album. Eachfolder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions.It is usually better to burn the disc all at once.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Longfile names and folder names can use more discmemory space than necessary. To conserve spaceon the disc, minimize the length of the file andfolder names. An MP3/WMA CD that was recordedusing no file folders can also be played. Thesystem can support up to eight folders in depth,though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimumin order to keep down the complexity andconfusion in trying to locate a particular folderduring playback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, five sessions, and999 files, the player lets you access and navigateup to the maximum, but all items over themaximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessedprior to any other directory.

207

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen a CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder function does not functionon a CD that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When a CD contains only compressed audio files,but no folders, all files are located under theroot folder. When the radio displays the name ofthe folder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Playback begins from the first track under theroot directory.

• When all tracks from the root directory haveplayed, playback continues from files,according to their numerical listing.

• After playing the last track from the last folder,the player begins playing again at the firsttrack of the first folder or root directory.

File System and NamingThe song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If thesong name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file name without theextension (such as MP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

208

Playing an MP3/WMAWhile the ignition is on, insert a CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,Loading, then Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMAdisplays. The CD should begin playing. A CD playsonly while the ignition is on or ACC (accessory).

As each new track starts to play, the track number,and the song name displays.



If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these

problems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does notplay properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled,see Care of Your CDs on page 216 for moreinformation.





209

All of the CD functions work the same whileplaying an MP3/WMA, except for those listed here.See “Playing a CD” earlier for more information.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press theSOUND button for longer than two seconds. Thesong title or other available information of a songscrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on. The scrollmode can be changed only when the SOUNDbutton is pressed for longer than two seconds.

DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat thetracks in the current directory. DIR displays.

Press this button again to repeat the tracks in allof the directories. ALL displays.

Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

¦¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (inMP3/WMA Mode): Press the up ¦ or down ¥SEEK arrow to change the folder. If CD-R does nothave any folder, “ROOT” flashes on the displayfor a short time.


TUNE arrow to go to the start of the current track.The player continues moving forward or backwardthrough the CD with each press of the up (

or down ) TUNE arrow.

INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press thisbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current MP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: Song Title, AlbumTitle, and Artist. Bit rate might also display.

When information is not available, No Info(information) displays.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tochange display mode.

210

Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-DiscPlayer)

MP3/WMA CD-R Disc

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or.wma extension, other file extensions mightnot work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album. Eachfolder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions.It is usually better to burn the disc all at once.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long filenames and folder names might use more discmemory space than necessary. To conserve spaceon the disc, minimize the length of the file and foldernames. An MP3/WMA CD that was recorded usingno file folders can also be played. The system cansupport up to eight folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in order tokeep down the difficulty and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback. If a CDcontains more than the maximum of 50 folders, fivesessions, and 999 files, the player lets you accessand navigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum is ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessedprior to any other directory.

211

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen a CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder function does not functionon a CD that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When a CD contains only compressed audio files,but no folders, all files are located under theroot folder. When the radio displays the name ofthe folder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks is played in the following order:

• Playback begins from the first track under theroot directory.

• When all tracks from the root directory haveplayed, playback continues from files,according to their numerical listing.

• After playing the last track from the last folder,the player begins playing again at the firsttrack of the first folder or root directory.

File System and NamingThe song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If thesong name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file name without theextension (such as MP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

212

Playing an MP3/WMAWhile the ignition is on, insert a CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,Loading, then Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMAdisplays. The CD should begin playing. A CD playsonly while the ignition is on or ACC (accessory).

As each new track starts to play, the track number,and the song name displays.



If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading

and ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 216 for more information.





213

All of the CD functions work the same whileplaying an MP3/WMA, except for those listed here.See “Playing a CD” earlier for more information.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Pressthe SOUND button for longer than two seconds.The song title and other available informationof the song scrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on.The scroll mode can be changed only whenthe SOUND button is pressed for longer thantwo seconds.

1 DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat thetracks in the current directory. DIR displays.

Press this button again to repeat the tracks in allof the directories. ALL displays.

Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

¦¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (inMP3/WMA Mode): Press the up ¦ or down ¥SEEK arrow to change the folder. If CD-R does nothave any folder, “ROOT” flashes on the displayfor a short time.



INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press thisbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current MP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: Song Title, AlbumTitle, and Artist. Bit rate might also display.

When information is not available, No Info(information) displays.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tochange display mode.

214

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

PWR (Power): Press and release this button toturn the audio system on. Press and hold thisbutton for more than two seconds to turn thesystem off.

When the system is on, press and release thisbutton to mute the system. Press and releasethis button again to turn the sound back on.

SEEK: Press and release this button within0.5 seconds to go to the next preset station.

Press and hold this button for longer than0.5 seconds to go to the next radio station.The radio seeks stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

When playing a CD, press and release this buttonwithin 0.5 seconds to go to the next track. Pressand hold this button for longer than 0.5 seconds tofast forward through the tracks.

MODE: Press and release this button to selectFM1, FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, AM-A, or CD (MP3).Press and release this button multiple times tocycle through the audio playback options that areavailable on your vehicle.

+ VOLUME −: Press the toggle bar locatedbelow the + VOLUME − to adjust the volume.Press the left side of the toggle bar, below the+ (plus) sign to increase the volume. Press theright side of the toggle bar, below the − (minus)sign to decrease the volume.

Front View of theSteering Wheel Controls

Side View of the VolumeControl

215

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static during normalradio reception can occur if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories,and external electronic devices are plugged intothe accessory power outlet. If there is interferenceor static, unplug the item from the accessorypower outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations boost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levels during the night.Static can also occur when things like stormsand power lines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing the treble onyour radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

216

Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback)The fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base located on theroof of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Backglass Antenna (Sedan)The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of the rear window isnot scratched and that the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it couldinterfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radioreception, the antenna connector at the top-centerof the rear window needs to be properly attached tothe post on the glass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damage caused

to your backglass antenna due to metallictinting materials will not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

Because this antenna is built into your rearwindow, there is a reduced risk of damage causedby car washes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that you do not damagethe grid lines for the AM-FM antenna. Thereis enough space between the lines to attach acellular telephone antenna without interfering withradio reception.

217

✍ NOTES

218

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 220Defensive Driving ...................................... 220Drunken Driving ........................................ 221Control of a Vehicle .................................. 224Braking ...................................................... 224Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 225Braking in Emergencies ............................. 227Steering .................................................... 228Off-Road Recovery .................................... 230Passing ..................................................... 230Loss of Control .......................................... 232Driving at Night ......................................... 234Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 235City Driving ............................................... 238

Freeway Driving ........................................ 239Before Leaving on a

Long Trip ............................................... 240Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 241Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 241Winter Driving ........................................... 243If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 248Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 249Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 249

Towing ........................................................ 258Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 258Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 258Towing a Trailer ........................................ 260

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

219

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

220

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:• Judgment• Muscular Coordination• Vision• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths havebeen associated with the use of alcohol, with morethan 300,000 people injured.Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends upon fourthings:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

221

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. Aperson who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally will

reach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

222

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you are with agroup, designate a driver who will notdrink.

223

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehiclego where you want it to go. They are the brakes,the steering, and the accelerator. All threesystems have to do their work at the places wherethe tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 264.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 163.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the conditionof the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

224

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 264.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle might have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light willcome on brieflywhen you start yourvehicle.

The warning light is on the instrument panelcluster for a sedan. See Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light on page 179. For hatchbackmodels, the warning light is on the SecondaryInformation Center (SIC). See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 179.

225

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

226

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You might feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — might be the wrong thing todo. Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do,the vehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeezethe brakes hard without locking the wheels. If youhear or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brakepedal. This will help you retain steering control. Ifyou do have ABS, it is different. See Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 225.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

227

SteeringPower SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is the onefactor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

228

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 264.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply the brakes — but, unless youhave anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock thewheels. See Braking on page 224. It is better toremove as much speed as you can from a possiblecollision. Then steer around the problem, to the leftor right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

229

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

230

So here are some tips for passing:• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,

and to crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing patterns. If you have anydoubt whatsoever about making a successfulpass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

231

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicletoo rapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts sayabout what happens when the three controlsystems — brakes, steering, andacceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

232

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. Forsafety, you will want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to these conditions. It is important to slowdown on slippery surfaces because stoppingdistance will be longer and vehicle control morelimited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

233

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

234

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

235

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even ifyour windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of theroad, and even people walking.It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

236

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 319.

237

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 239.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

238

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. Butthey have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive atthe same speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks asmooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freewayas a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust yourspeed to the posted limit or to the prevailingrate if it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless youwant to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

239

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on aLong TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make too manymiles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortableclothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

240

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness,or whatever.There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a

comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

241

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gearpossible.

242

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 319.

243

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tires meetthe road probably have good traction.However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.

244

But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. Ifyou do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 225. This system improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Whether you have ABS ornot, you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without ABS, ifyou feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on thebrakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

245

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be

careful.

246

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restartthe vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

247

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 249.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 335.

248

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)and a forward gear, or with a manual transaxle,between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) andREVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out. Ifyour vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 258.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight or maximum load amountand includes the weight of all occupants, cargo,and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels onyour vehicle show how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

249

Tire and Loading InformationLabel - United States

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 319 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 326.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. See “Certification Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs“ on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

250

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

251




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passenger, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Example 2 Example 3

252

Tire and Loading InformationLabel - Canada

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the driver’s side, centerpillar (B-pillar). This label shows the MaximumLoad amount, the number of occupant seatingpositions, the original equipment tires, andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 319 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 326.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. See “Certification Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from the Maximum Loadamount.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the Maximum Load amountequals 1400 lbs (635 kg) and there will befive 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg).

Label Example

253

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed nor intended to tow atrailer.


AVehicle Capacity Weightor Maximum Load, forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)


300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

254


AVehicle Capacity Weightor Maximum Load forExample 2 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)



AVehicle Capacity Weightor Maximum Load forExample 3 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s maximumload weight.

Example 2 Example 3

255

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’sdoor latch. This label tells you the gross weightcapacity of your vehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo. Never exceed the GVWR for yourvehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

Label Example - United States

Label Example - Canada

256

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

257

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 408.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle, such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

258

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 240.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” that follows for more information.

259

Dolly Towing

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground couldcause transaxle damage. Do not tow thevehicle from the rear with the front wheels onthe road.

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or amanual transaxle in NEUTRAL (N).

3. Set the parking brake and remove the key.

4. For an automatic transaxle, insert the key intothe shift-lock release slot. See Shifting Out ofPark (P) on page 120.

5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing a TrailerDo not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. Thevehicle is not designed or intended for such a use.Towing a trailer can adversely affect handling,durability and fuel economy.

260

Service ........................................................ 264Accessories and Modifications ................... 264California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 265Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 265Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 266Fuel ............................................................. 266

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 266Gasoline Specifications .............................. 266California Fuel ........................................... 267Additives ................................................... 267Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 268Filling the Tank ......................................... 269Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 272

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 273Hood Release ........................................... 274Engine Compartment Overview .................. 276Engine Oil ................................................. 277Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 281Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 283

Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 285Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 286Engine Coolant .......................................... 287Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 290Engine Overheating ................................... 290Cooling System ......................................... 292Power Steering Fluid ................................. 297Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 298Brakes ...................................................... 299Battery ...................................................... 303Jump Starting ............................................ 304

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 309Bulb Replacement ....................................... 309

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 309Headlamps (Hatchback) ............................. 310Headlamps (Sedan) ................................... 311Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps

(Hatchback) ............................................ 312Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps

(Sedan) .................................................. 313

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

261

Turn Signal Lamps (Side) .......................... 314Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

(CHMSL) (Sedan) .................................. 315Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps ............................... 316License Plate Lamp ................................... 317Replacement Bulbs ................................... 317

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 318Tires ............................................................ 319

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 320Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 323Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 326Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 327When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 329Buying New Tires ...................................... 330Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 331Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 332Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 333Wheel Replacement .................................. 333Tire Chains ............................................... 335If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 335

Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 336Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 337Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 339Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 344Compact Spare Tire .................................. 344

Appearance Care ........................................ 345Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 345Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 346Leather ...................................................... 347Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 348Care of Safety Belts .................................. 348Weatherstrips ............................................ 348Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 349Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 349Finish Care ............................................... 349Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 350Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 350Tires ......................................................... 351Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 351


262

Finish Damage .......................................... 352Underbody Maintenance ............................ 352Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 352Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 353

Vehicle Identification .................................. 354Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 354Service Parts Identification Label ............... 354

Electrical System ........................................ 355Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 355Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 355

Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 355Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 356Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 356Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 357Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 361

Capacities and Specifications .................... 368Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 369

Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 370


263

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep yourGM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM partshave one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine GM Accessories. Whenyou go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask forGM Accessories, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine GM Accessories.

264

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 420.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 82.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Part E: MaintenanceRecord on page 398.

265

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep the engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolinesmay contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommendsagainst the use of gasolines containing MMT. SeeAdditives on page 267 for additional information.

266

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 166 for sedans or MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 180 for hatchbacks. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used, repairs maynot be covered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

267

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

268

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

To open the fuel fillerdoor, pull up on therelease lever with thissymbol on it. It islocated on the floor onthe outboard side ofthe driver’s seat.

269

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a springin it; if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Hatchback shown. Sedan similar

270

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 349.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 180.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sureto get the right type. Your dealer can getone for you. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light andmay damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 180.

271

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other thanthe ground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

272

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

273

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handleinside the vehicle. Itis located on thelower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift upon the secondary hood release lever, locatedunder the front center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from itsretainer located on the underside of the hood.

274

4. Securely place the hood prop into the slot onthe inner fender.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood propfrom the slot in the inner fender and return theprop to its retainer. Lower the hood 12 inches(30 cm) above the vehicle and release it so it fullylatches. Check to make sure the hood is closedand repeat the process if necessary.

275

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, here is what you will see:

Automatic shown, Manual similar

276

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 281.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 277.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 277.

D. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 299 and HydraulicClutch on page 286.

E. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick. See AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 283.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 292.

G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 361.

H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 297.

I. Battery. See Battery on page 303.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 298.

Engine Oil

If the engine oilpressure light comeson, check the engine oillevel right away.

The oil pressure light is on the instrument panelcluster for sedans. See Oil Pressure Light onpage 169. For hatchbacks, the oil pressure light ison the Secondary Information Center (SIC).See Oil Pressure Light on page 184. You shouldcheck the engine oil level regularly; this is anadded reminder.

277

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 276for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark on thedipstick, you need to add at least one quart/literof oil. But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oilcrankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 368.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 276for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Push thedipstick all the way back in when you are through.

278

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

279

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine OilIf any one of these is true for you, use the shorttrip/city maintenance schedule:

• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This isparticularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling, such asfrequent driving in stop-and-go traffic.

• You frequently use a carrier on top ofyour vehicle.

• The vehicle is used for delivery service,police, taxi, or other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oilto break down sooner. If any one of these istrue for your vehicle, you need to change the oiland filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or3 months, whichever occurs first.

If none of them is true, use the long trip/highwaymaintenance schedule. Change the oil andfilter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months,whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under highway conditions willcause engine oil to break down slower.

280

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that canbe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer/retailer, a service station, or a localrecycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 276 for more information on location.

281

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the engine air cleaner/filter every15,000 miles (25 000 km) and replace it every30,000 miles (50 000 km). If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove thefilter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filterto release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Remove the screws and lift off the cover.

2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Put the cover back on tightly and tightenthe screws.

See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 374 for replacement intervals.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

282

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidCheck your automatic transaxle fluid level at leasttwice a year. Add fluid if needed. See At LeastTwice a Year on page 389.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is 158°Fto 176°F (70°C to 80°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

283

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The automatic transaxle dipstick is located towardthe front of the engine compartment, near thepower steering fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 276 for moreinformation on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push the dipstick back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, fluid shouldbe between MIN and MAX mark of the hotarea of the dipstick.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

284

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 396.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the area betweenthe two dimples in the hot range on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 396.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to thedealership service department and have it repairedas soon as possible. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 396 for the properfluid to use.

285

Hydraulic ClutchThere is one reservoir for both the brake and thehydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 299for more information.

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoiris filled with hydraulic fluid.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour master cylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Part B: Owner Checks and Serviceson page 389 and Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 396.

How to Check and Add Fluid

To check the fluid level, look on the side of thereservoir. If the fluid reaches the MAX (A) mark onthe reservoir, the fluid level is correct. If the fluiddoes not reach the MIN (B) mark on the reservoir,then fluid needs to be added. The reservoir islocated near the back of the engine compartmenton the driver’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 276 formore information on location.

286

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 290.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

287

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 396 for more information.

288

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rearof the engine compartment on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 276 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

To check the engine coolant, the vehicle must beon a level surface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should be between theMaximum (A) and Minimum (B) marks on thecoolant surge tank. The level rises at engineoperation temperature and drops again when theengine cools down.

289

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surgetank, but only when the engine is cool. If thecoolant surge tank is empty, a special fillprocedure is necessary. See Engine Overheatingon page 290 for instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 165.

290

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

291

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood, but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fan

292

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.To check the engine coolant, the vehicle shouldbe parked on a level surface. Make sure thatthe air conditioning is turned off.

The coolant level should be between the Minimumand Maximum marks on the coolant surge tankwhen the engine is cool. If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressure cap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

293

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not betweenthe Minimum and Maximum marks, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,but be sure the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool beforeyou do it. See Engine Coolant on page 287for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

294

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and a proper coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left to bevented out the discharge hose.

295

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture to the Maximum mark on thecoolant surge tank. Wait about five minutes,then check to see if the level is below themark. If the level is below the Maximum mark,add additional coolant to bring the level upto the mark. Repeat this procedure untilthe level remains constant at the Maximummark for at least five minutes.

296

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower than the Maximum mark, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolantsurge tank until the level reaches the mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.See your dealer, if necessary.

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power Steering FluidThe power steering fluid reservoir is located towardthe front of the engine compartment on the driver’sside of the vehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 276 for reservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

297

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

The level should be between the MIN (B) andMAX (A) marks on the reservoir. If the level dropsbelow the MIN (B) mark, add power steeringfluid. Do not overfill the reservoir and remember toreplace the cap tightly when you are finishedand clean up any spilled fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 396. Always use the proper fluid. Failureto use the proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 276for reservoir location.

298

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your vehicle hasone reservoir for boththe brake and clutchhydraulic systems. It isfilled with DOT-3brake fluid. See EngineCompartmentOverview on page 276for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The first is thatthe brake fluid goes down to an acceptable levelduring normal brake lining wear. When new liningsare put in, the fluid level goes back up. The otherreason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake orclutch system. If it is, you should have the brake/clutch system fixed, since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will not work well.

299

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. Ifyou add fluid when the linings are worn, then youwill have too much fluid when you get newbrake linings. You should add or remove brakefluid, as necessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutchhydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 163.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 396.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

300

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 349.

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and could haverear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.Some driving conditions or climates can causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with the brakes.

301

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specifications onpage 368.

If you have rear drum brakes, they do not havewear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brakerubbing noise, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspected each timethe tires are removed for rotation or changing.When you have the front brake pads replaced,have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

See Brake System Inspection on page 395.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is arapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a moderate brake stop, thedisc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely makea moderate or heavier stop, then the brakes mightnot adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,then — very carefully — make a few moderatebrake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),so the brakes will adjust properly.

If the brake pedal goes down farther than normal,the rear drum brakes might need adjustment.Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying thebrakes a few times.

302

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality brake parts. When you replace parts ofthe braking system — for example, when the brakelinings wear down and you need new ones putin — be sure you get new approved replacementparts. If you do not, the brakes might not workproperly. For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between the front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 276 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 304 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

303

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

304

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Findthe positive (+) and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. Your vehicle’spositive (+) terminal is located under ared tethered cap on the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 276 for moreinformation on location.Flip the cap up to access the positive (+)terminal.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

305

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep your handsaway from moving parts once the engineis running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

306

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect theother end of thenegative (−) cable atleast 18 inches(45 cm) away fromthe dead battery,but not near engineparts that move.

The electrical connection is just as goodthere, and the chance of sparks getting backto the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

307

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (–) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cap to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

308

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustmentto the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if itis difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontalaim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high-beamheadlamps at you (for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 317.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

309

Headlamps (Hatchback)To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 274 for more information.

2. Remove the five screws from top of theradiator grille.

3. Remove the radiator grille.

4. Remove the three bolts from theheadlamp assembly.

5. Remove the headlamp assembly.

6. Disconnect the wiring harness connector fromthe rear of the bulb.

7. Remove the headlamp cap.

310

8. Release the spring that retains the bulb byloosing the screw.

9. Remove the old bulb.

10. Install the new bulb.

11. Install the bulb retaining spring.

12. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to install theheadlamp assembly.

Headlamps (Sedan)To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:


2. Remove the three bolts from theheadlamp assembly.

3. Remove the headlamp assembly.

4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector fromthe rear of the bulb.

5. Remove the headlamp cap.

311

6. Release the spring that retains the bulb.

7. Remove the old bulb.


9. Install the bulb retaining spring.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to install theheadlamp assembly.

Front Turn Signal and ParkingLamps (Hatchback)To replace a front turn signal or parking lampbulb, do the following:

1. Remove the radiator grille and the headlampassembly. See Steps 2 through 5 underHeadlamps (Hatchback) on page 310 orHeadlamps (Sedan) on page 311 forinstructions on how to remove theheadlamp assembly.

2. Turn the front turn signal bulb socketcounterclockwise.

312

3. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of thelamp housing.

4. Press the bulb inward and turn itcounterclockwise to remove it from thebulb socket.

5. Install the new bulb into the socket bypressing it in and turning it clockwise.

6. Install the socket into the lamp housing byturning it clockwise.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install theassembly.

Front Turn Signal and ParkingLamps (Sedan)To replace a front turn signal or parking lampbulb, do the following:


2. Remove the headlamp assembly. See Steps 2through 4 under Headlamps (Hatchback) onpage 310 or Headlamps (Sedan) on page 311for instructions on how to remove theheadlamp assembly.

3. Turn the front turn signal bulb socketcounterclockwise.

4. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of thelamp housing.

5. Press the bulb inward and turn itcounterclockwise to remove it from thebulb socket.

313

6. Install the new bulb into the socket bypressing it in and turning it clockwise.

7. Install the socket into the lamp housing byturning it clockwise.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 2 under Headlamps(Hatchback) on page 310 or Headlamps(Sedan) on page 311 to install the assembly.

Turn Signal Lamps (Side)To replace a side turn signal bulb, do the following:


2. See Steps 2 through 5 under Headlamps(Hatchback) on page 310 or Headlamps(Sedan) on page 311 to access the side turnsignal lamps.

3. Remove the side turn signal lamp assemblyby pulling it forward.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.

5. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing bypulling the bulb straight out of the socket.

6. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket bypushing it in and rotating the bulb socketclockwise.

7. Push the side turn signal lamp assembly backinto its original position.

314

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Sedan)To replace a CHMSL bulb on the hatchback,contact your dealer/retailer.

To replace a CHMSL bulb on the sedan do thefollowing:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 97 formore information.

2. Remove the two screws and the lamphousing. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector before removing the lamp housing.

3. Remove the five screws and the reflectorassembly.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out ofthe bulb holder.


6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.

315

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo replace a taillamp, turn signal lamp, stoplamp,or back-up bulb, do the following:

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk onpage 97 or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 100for more information.

2. Remove the two screws and the lampassembly.

3. Remove the bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressingthe bulb and turning it counterclockwise.

5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp

housing. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto secure.

7. Reverse Step 2 to reinstall the lamp housing.

Hatchback

Sedan

316

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp towardyou through the opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-Up 94535571Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 94535587

Headlamps 94535548Front Parking/TurnSignal (Hatchback) 94535574

Front Parking/TurnSignal (Sedan) 94535574

Side Turn Signal (Hatchback) 94535587Side Turn Signal (Sedan) 94535587Stoplamp/Taillamps 94535574Turn Signal Lamps 94535572

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

317

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check”under Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 389 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways.

Here is how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiperblade off the arm.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

318

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 249.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 326.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

319

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger car tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date of manufacture.

Passenger Car Tire Example

320

(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 332.

(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 326 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See Compact Spare Tire on page 344 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 335.

Compact Spare Tire Example

321

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support thatload. See Compact Spare Tire on page 344 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 249.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 326.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger car tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U. S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as it is wide.

322

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheelin inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and the speed rating of atire. The load range represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed a tire is certified tocarry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and DefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 326.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

323

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 249.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 249.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

324

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 326 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 329.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 332.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249.

325

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 249. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 344.

326

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 329and Wheel Replacement on page 333 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important. SeePart A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 374.

327

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in thetire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on thetire and loading information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249 for an example ofthe tire and loading information label and where itis located on your vehicle. Make certain that allwheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel NutTorque” under Capacities and Specifications onpage 368.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 336.

328

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

329

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires thatare the same size, brand, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial and bias-beltedtires) as your vehicle’s original tires. This way, yourvehicle will continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the same performance andvehicle safety, during normal use, as the originaltires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 320for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 344.

330

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a differentsize than your original equipment wheels andtires, this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.

Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systemssuch as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 330 andAccessories and Modifications on page 264 foradditional information.

331

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum selection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the Unites States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (11⁄2) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction — AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

332

Temperature — A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular basis. However,if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, the alignment mayneed to be checked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tiresand wheels may need to be rebalanced. See yourdealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

333

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 336 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

334

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use only SAE Class “S”type chains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If you canhear the chains contacting your vehicle, stopand retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chains on will damageyour vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheelfirmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

335

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle shift leverin PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

336

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe compact spare tire and tools you will needare located in the trunk.

A. JackB. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack HandleD. Screwdriver

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk onpage 97 or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 100for more information.

2. Lift the trim cover.

337

3. Remove the foam tray.

4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and thewheel wrench from the foam tray.

5. Turn the retainer counterclockwise andremove it from the compact spare.

6. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 344 for more information.

338

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. It is recommended that you do a safety checkbefore preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 336 for more information.

2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, loosen thefour plastic caps by hand or by using thewheel wrench. The plastic nuts do not comeoff of the cover.

3. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end ofthe jack handle. Pry along the edge of thewheel cover until it comes off.Store the wheel cover in the cargo area untilyou have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

339

5. Locate the notch in the frame near eachwheel which the jack head fits in.

6. Position the jack and raise the jack head untilit fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’sframe nearest the flat tire.

7. Put the compact spare tire near you.

Hatchback Sedan

340

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and thewheel wrench onto the end of the jack handle.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

9. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit underneath thewheel well.

10. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning themcounterclockwise.

11. Remove the flat tire.

341

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from the places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel canbe used to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

12. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces andspare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose. Thevehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

342

14. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end ofthe nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand clockwise until the wheel is heldagainst the hub.

15. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheelwrench counterclockwise. Lower the jackcompletely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you haveto replace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 368for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 368 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

16. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourvehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put awheel cover on the compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

343

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools, dothe following:

1. Store the flat tire or the compact spare in thecompact spare tire compartment.

2. Secure the retainer.3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray and

place the tray back in the cargo area.4. Replace the trim cover.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 344.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airafter a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 50 mph (80 km/h), so you can finish yourtrip and have your full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. Of course, it is best to replaceyour spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.Your spare will last longer and be in good shapein case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

344

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

345

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interiorand does not improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

346

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

347

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required.

348

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 353. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 349.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 353.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishesthat are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

349

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield withglass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

350

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damage thealuminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush withtire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

351

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, wewill repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

352

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

353

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

354

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 82.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in thefuse block. An electrical overload will causethe lamps to turn off. If this happens, have yourheadlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and not snow,etc., be sure to get it fixed.

355

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse block protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links inthe wiring itself.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

There are spare fuses provided in the enginecompartment fuse block. If you ever have a problemon the road and do not have a spare fuse, you canborrow one that has the same amperage. Just picka feature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout — like the radio or cigarette lighter — anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace itas soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: theinstrument panel fuse block and the enginecompartment fuse block.

There is a fuse puller located on the enginecompartment fuse block. It can be used to easilyremove fuses from the fuse block.

356

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located on theend of the instrument panel on the driver’sside of the vehicle.

To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door bypulling the door out.

To reinstall the door, first insert the rear edge ofthe fuse panel door, then push the front of the doorinto the end of the instrument panel to secure it.

Hatchback

Sedan

357

Fuses Usage

AUX LTR Auxiliary Cigarette Lighter

HORN,REAR/FOG Horn, Rear Fog Lamps

LTR Cigarette Lighter

STOP Stop Lamp

RADIO, CLK Audio, Clock

CLSTR,HAZRD

Instrument Panel Cluster,Hazard Flasher

TRN/SIG Turn Signal

DR/LCK Door Lock, Remote Keyless Entry

CLSTR, CLK Instrument Panel Cluster, Clock

ECM, TCM Engine Control Module (ECM),Transaxle Control Module (TCM)

BCK/UP Back-Up Lamp

WPR, WSWA Wiper, Washer

ECM, TCM Engine Control Module (ECM),Transmission Control Module (TCM)

ENG FUSE Engine Fuse

ALTERNATOR Alternator

Hatchback

358

Fuses Usage

HVAC HVAC Blower

AIRBAG 1 Airbag 1

BLANK Not Used

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

DIODE (ABS) Anti-lock Brake System Diode

AIRBAG 2 Airbag 2

BLANK Not Used

CLK, RADIO Clock, Audio

Fuses Usage

SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module

WIPER Windshield Wiper Switch,Windshield Wiper Motor

CLUSTER Instrument Panel Cluster, BrakeSwitch, Anti-theft Mode

T/SIG Turn Signal, Hazard Switch

EMS2 Stoplamp Switch

Sedan

359

Fuses Usage

EMS1Engine Room Fuse Block, RearHO2S, Transaxle Control Module,VSS, Fuel Pump

STOP LAMP Brake Switch

CIGAR Cigarette Lighter, AuxiliaryPower Outlet

AUDIO/CLOCK Radio, Clock

OBD On-Board Diagnostics, Immobilizer

ROOM LAMP Trunk Lamp, Trunk Open Switch,Cluster, Dome Lamp

DEFOGGER Rear Defogger

SUNROOF Sunroof Module (Option)

DRL Daytime Running Lamps

Fuses Usage

DOOR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock

B/UP LAMP Back-up Lamps

HORN Horn

ELEC MIRROR Mirror Control Switch, Dome Lamp,Air Conditioning Switch

AUDIO/RKERadio, Remote Keyless Entry,Clock, Power Mirror Unit,Anti-Theft Module

DEFOGMIRROR

Power Mirror Unit, AirConditioning Switch

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

360

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located onthe driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 276for more information on location.

To access the fuses, pull out the top and bottomflaps to release the cover. To reinstall thecover, push the cover until it is secure.

Hatchback

Sedan

361

Fuses Usage

HI BEAM RT Passenger’s Side Headlamp High

DIODE (FOG) Fog Lamp Diode

Fuses Usage

HI BEAM LT Driver’s Side Headlamp High

BLANK Not Used

Hatchback

362

Fuses Usage

LOW BEAM RT Passenger’s Side Headlamp Low

ILLUM RT Parking Lamp Right Side,Illumination Circuit

LOW BEAM LT Driver’s Side Headlamp Low

ILLUM LT Driver’s Side Parking Lamp, LicensePlate Lamp

INT LTS Room Lamp

BLANK Not Used

DEFOG Defogger

S/ROOF Sunroof

ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Relay

HORN Horn

HEAD LAMPS Headlamps

FUEL Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

A/C Air Conditioning Compressor

FOG LAMPS Front Fog Lamp

HVACBLOWER

Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning Blower

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

I/P FUSEBATT. Instrument Panel Fuse Box

COOL FAN Radiator Fan

IGN 2 Ignition 2

BLANK Blank

IGN 1 Ignition 1

PWR WNDW Power Windows

SPARE Spare

363

Relays Usage

BLANK Not Used

COOLFAN LOW Cooling Fan Low

HEADLAMPS HI Headlamp High

HEADLAMPS LOW Headlamp Low

PWR WNDW Power Window

FRT FOG Fog Lamp

Relays Usage

COOL FNCNTRL Cooling Fan Control

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

A/C COMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High

ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Lamps

BLANK Not Used

364

Fuses Usage

BATT Instrument Panel Fuse Block

PK/LP LH Driver’s Side ParkingLamp, Taillamp

Fuses Usage

PK/LP RH Passenger’s Side ParkingLamp, Taillamp

IGN2/ST Ignition Switch

Sedan

365

Fuses Usage

ACC/IGN1 Ignition Switch

HAZARD Hazard Lamps, Theft-DeterrentSystem

H/L LOW RH Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed

H/L LOW LH Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp

FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps (Option)

FAN LOW Cooling Fan Low Speed

H/L HI High-Beam Headlamps

A/C COMP Air ConditioningCompressor (Option)

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

SPARE Spare

ABS Anti-lock Brake System (Option)

EMS2 LEGR Valve, HO2S, EVAP CanisterPurge Solenoid, CMP Sensor

P/WINDOW1 Power Window Switch (Option)

ECU Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module

SPARE Spare

EMS1Engine Control Module, Injector,Cooling Fan, Air ConditioningCompressor

SPARE Spare

366

Relays Usage

H/L LOWRELAY Low-Beam Headlamp Relay

FAN HI RELAY Cooling Fan High Speed Relay

FUEL PUMPRELAY Fuel Pump Relay

P/WINDOWRELAY Power Window Relay

PARK LAMPRELAY Parking Lamp Relay

FRT FOGRELAY Front Fog Lamps Relay

Relays Usage

H/L HI RELAY High-Beam Headlamp Relay

FAN LOWRELAY Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay

A/C RELAY Air Conditioning Relay (Option)

MAIN RELAY Main Relay

Misc. Usage

FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

367

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 396 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System 6.3 qt 6.0 LEngine Oil with Filter 3.96 qt 3.75 LFuel Tank 11.9 gal 45.0 LTransaxle, Automatic 6.2 qt 5.87 LTransaxle, Manual 1.9 qt 1.8 LWheel Nut Torque 81 lb ft 110 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

1.6L L4 (L91) 6 Automatic andManual 0.039-0.043 inch (1.0-1.1 mm)

368

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Passenger Compartment Filter 96539649 —

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96536694 —

Engine Oil Filter 96458873/96395221 —

Fuel Filter 96537170 —

Spark Plugs 96130723 IFR6E111

Windshield Wiper Blade- Hatchback

Driver’s Side 96497155 —

Passenger’s Side 96619022 —

Rear 96301840 —

Windshield Wiper Blade- Sedan

Driver’s Side 96648556 —

Passenger’s Side 96648561 —1NGK

369

Engine Drive Belt Routing

370

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 372Introduction ............................................... 372Maintenance Requirements ........................ 372Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 372How This Section is Organized ................. 373Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services .... 374Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 374Selecting the Right Schedule ..................... 375Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..... 376Long Trip/Highway Scheduled

Maintenance .......................................... 384Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 389At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 389

At Least Once a Month ............................. 389At Least Twice a Year .............................. 389At Least Once a Year ............................... 390Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .... 394Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ............... 394Exhaust System Inspection ........................ 394Fuel System Inspection ............................. 395Engine Cooling System Inspection ............. 395Brake System Inspection ........................... 395Part D: Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .............................................. 396Part E: Maintenance Record ...................... 398

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

371

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?The Plan supplements your new vehiclewarranties. See your Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary to keep yourvehicle in good working condition. Any damagecaused by failure to follow scheduled maintenancemay not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

372

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided intofive parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”explains what to have done and how often.Some of these services can be complex, sounless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should letyour dealer/retailer do these jobs.

Your dealer/retailer has trained and supportedservice people that will perform the workusing genuine parts.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 265.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 420.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells youwhat should be checked and when. It alsoexplains what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains important inspections that yourdealer/retailer can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products necessary tohelp keep your vehicle properly maintained. Theseproducts, or their equivalents, should be usedwhether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place foryou to record and keep track of the maintenanceperformed on your vehicle. Keep yourmaintenance receipts. They may be needed toqualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

373

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance serviceswhich are to be performed at the mileage intervalsspecified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you willdrive it. You may drive short distances only afew times a week. Or you may drive long distancesall the time in very hot, dusty weather. You mayuse your vehicle in making deliveries. Or youmay drive it to work, to do errands, or in manyother ways.

Because of the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You mightneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see yourdealer/retailer.

This part tells you the maintenance services youshould have done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that trained andsupported service people will perform thework using genuine parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedin Part D. Make sure whoever services yourvehicle uses these. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you oranyone else drives the vehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these onthe Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 266.

374

Selecting the Right ScheduleFirst you will need to decide which of thetwo schedules is right for your vehicle. Here ishow to decide which schedule to follow:

Short Trip/City DefinitionFollow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ifany one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km).

This is particularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling, such asfrequent driving in stop-and-go traffic.

• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,police, taxi, or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this scheduleif you operate your vehicle under any of theseconditions is that these conditions cause engine oilto break down sooner.

Short Trip/City IntervalsEvery 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil andFilter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Inspection. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Replacement. Spark PlugReplacement. EVAP System Service. PCV SystemService. Timing Belt Inspection. Brake/Clutch FluidChange (or 24 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 42,000 Miles (70 000 km): Engine Oil PanDrain Plug Washer Replacement.

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark PlugWire Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement.EVAP System Solenoid Valve Replacement.

Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel FilterReplacement.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): CoolingSystem Service.

These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the complete scheduledmaintenance on the following pages.

375

Long Trip/Highway DefinitionFollow this scheduled maintenance only if none ofthe conditions from the Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenance are true. Do not use this scheduleif the vehicle is driven in a dusty area or used offpaved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedulefor these conditions.

Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine underhighway conditions will cause engine oil to breakdown slower.

Long Trip/Highway IntervalsEvery 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil andFilter Change (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Inspection. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Replacement. Spark PlugReplacement. EVAP System Service. PCV SystemService. Timing Belt Inspection. Brake/Clutch FluidChange (or 24 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark PlugWire Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement.EVAP System Solenoid Valve Replacement.

Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel FilterReplacement. Engine Oil Pan Drain Plug WasherReplacement.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): CoolingSystem Service.

These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the complete scheduledmaintenance on the following pages.

Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should berepeated at the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km) for the life of this vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 389 and Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 394.

376

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 395.

3,000 Miles (5 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.



❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)








❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,replace the filter. If vehicle is driven industy/dirty conditions, inspect filter at everyengine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 281 for more information.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).

377








❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +)






❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 281 for more information.


❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.

378

❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAPvent solenoid valve. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first).










❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)






379

















❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Replace timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines.

Replace EVAP vent solenoid valve.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

380


















381








❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)





❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, thefilter may require replacement more often.

❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 281 for moreinformation.



❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

382

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP

vent solenoid valve. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)










150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.

This service can be complex; you shouldhave your dealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 287 for whatto use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and neck. Pressuretest the cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service.

383

Long Trip/Highway ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should berepeated at the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km) for the life of this vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 389 and Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 394.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.+ A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 395.







❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 281 for more information.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)


384










❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP







385












❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If youdrive regularly under dusty conditions, the filtermay require replacement more often.




❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Replace timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace

EVAP vent solenoid valve. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

386








❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If youdrive regularly under dusty conditions, the filtermay require replacement more often.


❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)





387



❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you

drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filtermay require replacement more often.




❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.(See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and EVAP







150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.

This service can be complex; you shouldhave your dealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 287 for whatto use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and neck. Pressuretest the cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service.

388

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure the safety, dependabilityand emission control performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendantto perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 277 forfurther details.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add the propercoolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 287 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 298 for further details.

At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation CheckInspect the tires and make sure the tires are inflatedto the correct pressures. Do not forget to check thespare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 326.

At Least Twice a YearRestraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.)

389

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Alsosee Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 350.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather more frequent applicationmay be required. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 396.

Manual Transaxle CheckIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. Have the system inspectedand repaired if needed.

Automatic Transaxle CheckCheck the transaxle fluid level; add if needed.See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 283.A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check thesystem and repair if needed.

Hydraulic Clutch System CheckCheck the fluid level in the brake/clutch reservoir.See Hydraulic Clutch on page 286. A fluid lossin this system could indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired at once.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondarylatch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood andbody door hinges, rear compartment, and anyfolding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.More frequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment.

390

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 117if necessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try tostart the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in anyother position, your vehicle needs service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway and try to start the engine.The starter should work only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the starter works when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, your vehicleneeds service.

391

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 117 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shift leverout of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shiftlever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicleneeds service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transmission, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

• With a manual transmission, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when you press thekey release button.

On all vehicles, the ignition key should come outonly in LOCK.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.It should only lock when turned to the right.

392

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

393

Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsListed in this part are inspections and serviceswhich should be performed at least twice a year,for instance, each spring and fall. You shouldlet your dealer/retailer do these jobs. Make sureany necessary repairs are completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services canbe found in a service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 420.

Steering, Suspension and FrontDrive Axle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectthe power steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot sealsfor damage, tears or leakage. Replace sealsif necessary.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect thebody near the exhaust system. Look for broken,damaged, missing, or out-of-position parts as wellas open seams, holes, loose connections, orother conditions which could cause a heat build-upin the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes intothe vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 122.

394

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damageor leaks.

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace asneeded. Clean the outside of the radiator andair conditioning condenser. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap is recommended at least oncea year.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads forwear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspectdrum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspectother brake parts, including drums, wheelcylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Checkparking brake adjustment. You may need to haveyour brakes inspected more often if your drivinghabits or conditions result in frequent braking.

395

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 277.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 287.


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

AutomaticTransmission

Use only T-IV AutomaticTransmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,in Canada 22689186).

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

396


ManualTransmissionShift Linkage

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

397

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed theservice and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

398

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


399

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


400

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 402Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 402Online Owner Center ................................. 405Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 406Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 406GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 407Roadside Assistance Program ................... 408Courtesy Transportation ............................. 411Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 413Collision Damage Repair ........................... 414

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 419Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 419Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 419Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 419Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 420

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

401

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

402

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

403

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed in about70 days. We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

404

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for yourGM ownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for servicenationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

405

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, theletter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

406

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries (ExceptPuerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

407

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872).

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consent ofthe owner is not eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in Canada). Serviceto provide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternativefuels will not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present personal identificationbefore lock-out service is provided. In Canada,the vehicle registration is also required.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. Aremote unlock may be available if you have anactive OnStar® subscription.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired insand, mud, or snow.

408

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated, is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel information pertaining toyour trip.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en route andover 250 kilometres from original point of

departure, you may qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Theremay be times, when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance, your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

409

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

410

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

411

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.

customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

412

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computersystems that monitor and control severalaspects of the vehicle’s performance. Yourvehicle uses on-board vehicle computersto monitor emission control components tooptimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions

for airbag deployment and, if the vehicle hasthe Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver controlthe vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored onlyin a crash event by computer systems, suchas those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it wasoperated, such as data related to engine speed,brake application, throttle position, vehiclespeed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness,airbag performance, and the severity of acollision. This information has been used toimprove vehicle crash performance and may beused to improve crash performance of futurevehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

413

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or thedevice that stores the data is required. GM willnot access information about a crash eventor share it with others other than:• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if

the vehicle is leased, with the consent ofthe lessee,

• in response to an official request of policeor similar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to bemaintained and need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can readthe information if they have access to thevehicle or the device that stores the data.If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement orowner manual for information on its operationsand data collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

414

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, maybe an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer mayhave a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair center that hasGM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

415

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switching toanother insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved inan accident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 408 formore information.

416

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items inyour vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select adealer/retailer or a private collision repairfacility to fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, youwill have to feel comfortable with their work fora long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

417

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially value

the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

418

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer/retailer,or General Motors.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

419

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

420

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual includes the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specify year andmodel name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

421

✍ NOTES

422

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 264Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 83Additives, Fuel ............................................ 267Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 355Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 281Air Conditioning ........................................... 150Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator .............. 161, 177Readiness Light .............................. 160, 176

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 413

Airbag System ............................................... 68What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 76When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 74Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 71

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 75Passenger Sensing System ....................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75

AM-FM Radio ..................................... 187, 189Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 217Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 217Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 225Anti-Lock Brake, System

Warning Light .................................. 164, 179Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 350Care of Safety Belts ................................ 348Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 352Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 349Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 345Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 346Finish Care .............................................. 349Finish Damage ......................................... 352Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 348Leather .................................................... 347Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 351Tires ........................................................ 351Underbody Maintenance ........................... 352Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 353Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 349Weatherstrips ........................................... 348Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 350

Ashtray ....................................................... 148

423

Audio System .............................................. 186AM-FM Radio .................................. 187, 189Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 215Backglass Antenna ................................... 217Care of Your CD Player ........................... 216Care of Your CDs .................................... 216Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 217Radio with CD ......................................... 193Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 200Understanding Radio Reception ............... 216

Automatic TransaxleFluid ........................................................ 283Operation ................................................. 112

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 217Battery ........................................................ 303

Inadvertent Power Saver .......................... 147Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 240

BrakeEmergencies ............................................ 227Parking .................................................... 117System Inspection .................................... 395

Brakes ........................................................ 299System Warning Light .............................. 163

Braking ....................................................... 224Braking in Emergencies ............................... 227Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 107Bulb Replacement ....................................... 309

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 315

Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps ............................. 312, 313

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 309Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 309Headlamps ...................................... 310, 311License Plate Lamps ................................ 317Replacement Bulbs .................................. 317Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 316Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 314

Buying New Tires ........................................ 330

424

CCalifornia Fuel ............................................. 267California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 265Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 368Carbon Monoxide ............... 97, 122, 243, 260Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 348Your CD Player ........................................ 216Your CDs ................................................. 216

CD, MP3 ............................................ 207, 211Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 315Center Rear Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 39Chains, Tire ................................................. 335Charging System Light ....................... 163, 179Check

Engine Light .................................... 166, 180Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 273Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 352Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 47Infants and Young Children ........................ 44Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 53Older Children ........................................... 41

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 61Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 64Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 52

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 148Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 350Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 349Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 346Finish Care .............................................. 349Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 345Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 348Leather .................................................... 347Tires ........................................................ 351Underbody Maintenance ........................... 352Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 349Weatherstrips ........................................... 348Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 350

Climate Control System ............................... 150Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 154Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 154

Clock .................................................. 149, 175Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 286

425

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 414Compact Spare Tire .................................... 344Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 224Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 165Heater, Engine ......................................... 110Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 290

Cooling System ........................................... 292Cruise Control ............................................. 141Cruise Control Light .................................... 171Cupholder(s) ................................................ 127Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 411Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 406Customer Assistance Offices .................... 406Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 402GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 407Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 419Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 419Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 419Roadside Assistance Program .................. 408Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 420

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 145Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ....... 171Defensive Driving ........................................ 220Disc, MP3 .......................................... 207, 211Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 265Dome Lamp ................................................ 147Door

Ajar Light ........................................ 172, 185Central Door Unlocking System ................. 95Door Ajar Reminder ................................... 95Locks ......................................................... 94Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 234City .......................................................... 238Defensive ................................................. 220Drunken ................................................... 221Freeway ................................................... 239Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 241In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 235Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 249Winter ...................................................... 243

426

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 355Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 361Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 356Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 355Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 357Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 356Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 355

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 281Check and Service Engine

Soon Light ................................... 166, 180Coolant .................................................... 287Coolant Heater ......................................... 110Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 165Cooling System Inspection ....................... 395Drive Belt Routing .................................... 370Engine Compartment Overview ................ 276Exhaust ................................................... 122Oil ........................................................... 277Overheating ............................................. 290Running While Parked ............................. 123Starting .................................................... 109

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 413Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 40Exterior Lamps ............................................ 144

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 281Finish Damage ............................................ 352Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 217Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 135Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 138Flat Tire ...................................................... 335Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 336Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 344Fluid

Manual Transaxle ..................................... 285Power Steering ........................................ 297Windshield Washer .................................. 298

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 146

Fog Lamp Light .................................. 170, 185Fuel ............................................................ 266

Additives .................................................. 267California Fuel .......................................... 267Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 272

427

Fuel (cont.)Filling Your Tank ...................................... 269Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 268Gage ....................................................... 172Gasoline Octane ...................................... 266Gasoline Specifications ............................ 266Low Warning Light ................................... 173System Inspection .................................... 395

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 361Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 356Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 357Windshield Wiper ..................................... 355

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 165Fuel ......................................................... 172Speedometer ........................................... 159Tachometer .............................................. 159

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 266Specifications ........................................... 266

Glove Box ................................................... 127GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 407

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 135Head Restraints ............................................ 12Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 309Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 355Headlamps ......................................... 310, 311

Bulb Replacement .................................... 309Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 145Exterior Lamps ......................................... 144Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 138Front Turn Signal and

Parking Lamps ............................. 312, 313Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 309High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 138On Reminder ........................................... 145Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 314

Heater ......................................................... 150Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 171Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 241Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 241Hold Mode Light ................................. 165, 180Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 273Release ................................................... 274

428

Horn ............................................................ 136How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 286

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 108Immobilizer .................................................. 106Immobilizer Operation .................................. 106Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ................. 147Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 44Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 326Inspection

Brake System .......................................... 395Engine Cooling System ............................ 395Exhaust System ....................................... 394Fuel System ............................................ 395Part C - Periodic Maintenance ................. 394Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal .............................. 394Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 132Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 146Cluster ..................................................... 156

JJump Starting .............................................. 304

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 90Keys ............................................................. 88

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 320Lamps

Dome ....................................................... 147Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .............. 147

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 53

License Plate Lamps ................................... 317Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ..................................... 100Light

Airbag Readiness ............................ 160, 176Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ..... 164, 179Brake System Warning ............................. 163Charging System ............................. 163, 179Cruise Control .......................................... 171Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 171

429

Light (cont.)Door Ajar ........................................ 172, 185Fog Lamp ....................................... 170, 185Highbeam On .......................................... 171Hold Mode ...................................... 165, 180Low Fuel Warning .................................... 173Malfunction Indicator ....................... 166, 180Oil Pressure .................................... 169, 184Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 161Safety Belt Reminder ...................... 160, 175Safety Belt Reminder Tone ...................... 160

LightsExterior Lamps ......................................... 144Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 138High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 138On Reminder ........................................... 145

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 249Lockout Protection ......................................... 97Locks

Central Door Unlocking System ................. 95Door .......................................................... 94Lockout Protection ..................................... 97Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96

Long Trip/Highway ScheduledMaintenance ............................................ 384

Loss of Control ........................................... 232Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 173Lumbar

Manual Controls .......................................... 9

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .... 369Maintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 389At Least Once a Month ............................ 389At Least Once a Year .............................. 390At Least Twice a Year .............................. 389Brake System Inspection .......................... 395Engine Cooling System Inspection ........... 395Exhaust System Inspection ...................... 394Fuel System Inspection ............................ 395How This Section is Organized ................ 373Introduction .............................................. 372Long Trip/Highway Scheduled

Maintenance ......................................... 384Maintenance Requirements ...................... 372Part A - Scheduled Maintenance

Services ............................................... 374Part B - Owner Checks and Services ...... 389Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ........................................... 394Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................. 396Part E - Maintenance Record ................... 398Selecting the Right Schedule ................... 375Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..... 376

430

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection .............. 394Using ....................................................... 374Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 372

Malfunction Indicator Light .................. 166, 180Manual Lumbar Controls ................................. 9Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 285Operation ................................................. 116

Manual Windows ......................................... 101Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 124Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 126Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 126Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 124Outside Power Mirror ............................... 125

MP3 ................................................... 207, 211MyGMLink.com ............................................ 405

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 107Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 369

OOdometer .................................................... 159Odometer, Trip ............................................ 159Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 230Oil

Engine ..................................................... 277Pressure Light ................................. 169, 184

Older Children, Restraints ............................. 41Online Owner Center ................................... 405Other Warning Devices ................................ 136Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 154Outlets

Accessory Power ..................................... 147Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 126Heated Mirrors ......................................... 126Manual Mirrors ......................................... 124Power Mirror ............................................ 125

Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

431

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 352Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 118Shifting Out of ......................................... 120

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 117Over Things That Burn ............................ 121

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 121Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services .... 374Part B - Owner Checks and Services .......... 389Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ... 394Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ................................................ 396Part E - Maintenance Record ...................... 398Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...... 161, 177Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 154Passenger Sensing System ........................... 77Passing ....................................................... 230Power

Electrical System ..................................... 356Inadvertent Battery Saver ......................... 147Steering Fluid .......................................... 297Windows .................................................. 102

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 40Privacy ........................................................ 413

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 24

RRadios ........................................................ 186

AM-FM Radio .................................. 187, 189Care of Your CD Player ........................... 216Care of Your CDs .................................... 216Radio with CD ......................................... 193Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 200Understanding Reception ......................... 216

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 96Rear Seat Operation .............................. 13, 15Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 35Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 141Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 124Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 258Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 90Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 91Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 339Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 337Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 317

432

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government ............................. 419General Motors ........................................ 419United States Government ....................... 419

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 85Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 34Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 408Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 249Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 370Running the Engine While Parked ............... 123

SSafety Belt

Pretensioners ............................................. 40Reminder Light ................................ 160, 175Reminder Tone ........................................ 160

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 348Center Rear Passenger Position ................ 39Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25

Safety Belts (cont.)Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 35Right Front Passenger Position .................. 34Safety Belt Extender .................................. 40Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 34Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 33

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Head Restraints ......................................... 12Manual ........................................................ 8Manual Lumbar ............................................ 9Rear Seat Operation ........................... 13, 15Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10

Secondary Information Center (SIC) ............ 174Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ..................................... 61Right Front Seat Position ........................... 64

Selecting the Right Schedule,Maintenance ............................................ 375

Service ........................................................ 264Accessories and Modifications .................. 264Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 266

433

Service (cont.)California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 265Doing Your Own Work ............................. 265Engine Soon Light ........................... 166, 180Publications Ordering Information ............. 420

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 82Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 351Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 120Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ........ 376Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 33Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 138Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 344Installing .................................................. 339Removing ................................................ 337Storing ..................................................... 344

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 368Speedometer ............................................... 159Starting Your Engine ................................... 109Steering ...................................................... 228Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ................. 394Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 215Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 136

Storage Areas ............................................. 126Cupholder(s) ............................................ 127Glove Box ................................................ 127Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............ 127

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 248Sun Visors .................................................. 103Sunroof ....................................................... 128

TTachometer ................................................. 159Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-upLamps .................................................. 316

Theft-Deterrent System ................................ 103Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 103

Immobilizer .............................................. 106Immobilizer Operation .............................. 106

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 136Time ........................................................... 149Tires ........................................................... 319

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 350Buying New Tires ..................................... 330Chains ..................................................... 335Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 336

434

Tires (cont.)Cleaning .................................................. 351Compact Spare Tire ................................. 344Different Size ........................................... 331If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 335Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 326Inspection and Rotation ............................ 327Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 339Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 339Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 337Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 344Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 320Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 323Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 332Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 333Wheel Replacement ................................. 333When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 329

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 258Towing a Trailer ....................................... 260Your Vehicle ............................................. 258

TransaxleFluid, Manual ........................................... 285

Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 116Trip Odometer ............................................. 159

Trunk ............................................................ 97Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 138Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 137

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 216Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 332

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 224Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 249Parking Your ............................................ 121Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders ........................................ 413

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 354Service Parts Identification Label .............. 354

Vehicle Privacy ............................................ 413Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 154Visors .......................................................... 103

435

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 156Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 135Other Warning Devices ............................ 136Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 333Different Size ........................................... 331Replacement ............................................ 333

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 52Windows ..................................................... 101

Manual ..................................................... 101Power ...................................................... 102

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 140Washer Fluid ........................................... 298Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 318Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 350Wiper Fuses ............................................ 355Wipers ..................................................... 139

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 141Winter Driving ............................................. 243

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 372

436

2007 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M - General Motors …€¦ · · 2011-10-24Service and...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M - General Motors …€¦ · · 2011-10-24Service and...